fork for IVI

[profile/ivi/vim.git] / runtime / doc / options.txt

*options.txt*   For Vim version 7.3.  Last change: 2011 Dec 14


                  VIM REFERENCE MANUAL    by Bram Moolenaar


Options                                                 *options*

1. Setting options                      |set-option|
2. Automatically setting options        |auto-setting|
3. Options summary                      |option-summary|

For an overview of options see help.txt |option-list|.

Vim has a number of internal variables and switches which can be set to
achieve special effects.  These options come in three forms:
        boolean         can only be on or off           *boolean* *toggle*
        number          has a numeric value
        string          has a string value

==============================================================================
1. Setting options                                      *set-option* *E764*

                                                        *:se* *:set*
:se[t]                  Show all options that differ from their default value.

:se[t] all              Show all but terminal options.

:se[t] termcap          Show all terminal options.  Note that in the GUI the
                        key codes are not shown, because they are generated
                        internally and can't be changed.  Changing the terminal
                        codes in the GUI is not useful either...

                                                                *E518* *E519*
:se[t] {option}?        Show value of {option}.

:se[t] {option}         Toggle option: set, switch it on.
                        Number option: show value.
                        String option: show value.

:se[t] no{option}       Toggle option: Reset, switch it off.

                                                           *:set-!* *:set-inv*
:se[t] {option}!   or
:se[t] inv{option}      Toggle option: Invert value. {not in Vi}

                                *:set-default* *:set-&* *:set-&vi* *:set-&vim*
:se[t] {option}&        Reset option to its default value.  May depend on the
                        current value of 'compatible'. {not in Vi}
:se[t] {option}&vi      Reset option to its Vi default value. {not in Vi}
:se[t] {option}&vim     Reset option to its Vim default value. {not in Vi}

:se[t] all&             Set all options, except terminal options, to their
                        default value.  The values of 'term', 'lines' and
                        'columns' are not changed. {not in Vi}

                                                *:set-args* *E487* *E521*
:se[t] {option}={value}         or
:se[t] {option}:{value}
                        Set string or number option to {value}.
                        For numeric options the value can be given in decimal,
                        hex (preceded with 0x) or octal (preceded with '0')
                        (hex and octal are only available for machines which
                        have the strtol() function).
                        The old value can be inserted by typing 'wildchar' (by
                        default this is a <Tab> or CTRL-E if 'compatible' is
                        set).  See |cmdline-completion|.
                        White space between {option} and '=' is allowed and
                        will be ignored.  White space between '=' and {value}
                        is not allowed.
                        See |option-backslash| for using white space and
                        backslashes in {value}.

:se[t] {option}+={value}                                *:set+=*
                        Add the {value} to a number option, or append the
                        {value} to a string option.  When the option is a
                        comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
                        value was empty.
                        If the option is a list of flags, superfluous flags
                        are removed.  When adding a flag that was already
                        present the option value doesn't change.
                        Also see |:set-args| above.
                        {not in Vi}

:se[t] {option}^={value}                                *:set^=*
                        Multiply the {value} to a number option, or prepend
                        the {value} to a string option.  When the option is a
                        comma separated list, a comma is added, unless the
                        value was empty.
                        Also see |:set-args| above.
                        {not in Vi}

:se[t] {option}-={value}                                *:set-=*
                        Subtract the {value} from a number option, or remove
                        the {value} from a string option, if it is there.
                        If the {value} is not found in a string option, there
                        is no error or warning.  When the option is a comma
                        separated list, a comma is deleted, unless the option
                        becomes empty.
                        When the option is a list of flags, {value} must be
                        exactly as they appear in the option.  Remove flags
                        one by one to avoid problems.
                        Also see |:set-args| above.
                        {not in Vi}

The {option} arguments to ":set" may be repeated.  For example: >
        :set ai nosi sw=3 ts=3
If you make an error in one of the arguments, an error message will be given
and the following arguments will be ignored.

                                                        *:set-verbose*
When 'verbose' is non-zero, displaying an option value will also tell where it
was last set.  Example: >
        :verbose set shiftwidth cindent?
<         shiftwidth=4 ~
                  Last set from modeline ~
          cindent ~
                  Last set from /usr/local/share/vim/vim60/ftplugin/c.vim ~
This is only done when specific option values are requested, not for ":verbose
set all" or ":verbose set" without an argument.
When the option was set by hand there is no "Last set" message.
When the option was set while executing a function, user command or
autocommand, the script in which it was defined is reported.
Note that an option may also have been set as a side effect of setting
'compatible'.
A few special texts:
        Last set from modeline ~
                Option was set in a |modeline|.
        Last set from --cmd argument ~
                Option was set with command line argument |--cmd| or +.
        Last set from -c argument ~
                Option was set with command line argument |-c|, +, |-S| or
                |-q|.
        Last set from environment variable ~
                Option was set from an environment variable, $VIMINIT,
                $GVIMINIT or $EXINIT.
        Last set from error handler ~
                Option was cleared when evaluating it resulted in an error.

{not available when compiled without the |+eval| feature}

                                                        *:set-termcap* *E522*
For {option} the form "t_xx" may be used to set a terminal option.  This will
override the value from the termcap.  You can then use it in a mapping.  If
the "xx" part contains special characters, use the <t_xx> form: >
        :set <t_#4>=^[Ot
This can also be used to translate a special code for a normal key.  For
example, if Alt-b produces <Esc>b, use this: >
        :set <M-b>=^[b
(the ^[ is a real <Esc> here, use CTRL-V <Esc> to enter it)
The advantage over a mapping is that it works in all situations.

You can define any key codes, e.g.: >
        :set t_xy=^[foo;
There is no warning for using a name that isn't recognized.  You can map these
codes as you like: >
        :map <t_xy> something
<                                                               *E846*
When a key code is not set, it's like it does not exist.  Trying to get its
value will result in an error: >
        :set t_kb=
        :set t_kb
        E846: Key code not set: t_kb

The t_xx options cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
security reasons.

The listing from ":set" looks different from Vi.  Long string options are put
at the end of the list.  The number of options is quite large.  The output of
"set all" probably does not fit on the screen, causing Vim to give the
|more-prompt|.

                                                        *option-backslash*
To include white space in a string option value it has to be preceded with a
backslash.  To include a backslash you have to use two.  Effectively this
means that the number of backslashes in an option value is halved (rounded
down).
A few examples: >
   :set tags=tags\ /usr/tags        results in "tags /usr/tags"
   :set tags=tags\\,file            results in "tags\,file"
   :set tags=tags\\\ file           results in "tags\ file"

The "|" character separates a ":set" command from a following command.  To
include the "|" in the option value, use "\|" instead.  This example sets the
'titlestring' option to "hi|there": >
   :set titlestring=hi\|there
This sets the 'titlestring' option to "hi" and 'iconstring' to "there": >
   :set titlestring=hi|set iconstring=there

Similarly, the double quote character starts a comment.  To include the '"' in
the option value, use '\"' instead.  This example sets the 'titlestring'
option to 'hi "there"': >
   :set titlestring=hi\ \"there\"

For MS-DOS and WIN32 backslashes in file names are mostly not removed.  More
precise: For options that expect a file name (those where environment
variables are expanded) a backslash before a normal file name character is not
removed.  But a backslash before a special character (space, backslash, comma,
etc.) is used like explained above.
There is one special situation, when the value starts with "\\": >
   :set dir=\\machine\path          results in "\\machine\path"
   :set dir=\\\\machine\\path       results in "\\machine\path"
   :set dir=\\path\\file            results in "\\path\file" (wrong!)
For the first one the start is kept, but for the second one the backslashes
are halved.  This makes sure it works both when you expect backslashes to be
halved and when you expect the backslashes to be kept.  The third gives a
result which is probably not what you want.  Avoid it.

                                *add-option-flags* *remove-option-flags*
                                *E539* *E550* *E551* *E552*
Some options are a list of flags.  When you want to add a flag to such an
option, without changing the existing ones, you can do it like this: >
   :set guioptions+=a
Remove a flag from an option like this: >
   :set guioptions-=a
This removes the 'a' flag from 'guioptions'.
Note that you should add or remove one flag at a time.  If 'guioptions' has
the value "ab", using "set guioptions-=ba" won't work, because the string "ba"
doesn't appear.

                           *:set_env* *expand-env* *expand-environment-var*
Environment variables in specific string options will be expanded.  If the
environment variable exists the '$' and the following environment variable
name is replaced with its value.  If it does not exist the '$' and the name
are not modified.  Any non-id character (not a letter, digit or '_') may
follow the environment variable name.  That character and what follows is
appended to the value of the environment variable.  Examples: >
   :set term=$TERM.new
   :set path=/usr/$INCLUDE,$HOME/include,.
When adding or removing a string from an option with ":set opt-=val" or ":set
opt+=val" the expansion is done before the adding or removing.


Handling of local options                       *local-options*

Some of the options only apply to a window or buffer.  Each window or buffer
has its own copy of this option, thus can each have their own value.  This
allows you to set 'list' in one window but not in another.  And set
'shiftwidth' to 3 in one buffer and 4 in another.

The following explains what happens to these local options in specific
situations.  You don't really need to know all of this, since Vim mostly uses
the option values you would expect.  Unfortunately, doing what the user
expects is a bit complicated...

When splitting a window, the local options are copied to the new window.  Thus
right after the split the contents of the two windows look the same.

When editing a new buffer, its local option values must be initialized.  Since
the local options of the current buffer might be specifically for that buffer,
these are not used.  Instead, for each buffer-local option there also is a
global value, which is used for new buffers.  With ":set" both the local and
global value is changed.  With "setlocal" only the local value is changed,
thus this value is not used when editing a new buffer.

When editing a buffer that has been edited before, the last used window
options are used again.  If this buffer has been edited in this window, the
values from back then are used.  Otherwise the values from the window where
the buffer was edited last are used.

It's possible to set a local window option specifically for a type of buffer.
When you edit another buffer in the same window, you don't want to keep
using these local window options.  Therefore Vim keeps a global value of the
local window options, which is used when editing another buffer.  Each window
has its own copy of these values.  Thus these are local to the window, but
global to all buffers in the window.  With this you can do: >
        :e one
        :set list
        :e two
Now the 'list' option will also be set in "two", since with the ":set list"
command you have also set the global value. >
        :set nolist
        :e one
        :setlocal list
        :e two
Now the 'list' option is not set, because ":set nolist" resets the global
value, ":setlocal list" only changes the local value and ":e two" gets the
global value.  Note that if you do this next: >
        :e one
You will not get back the 'list' value as it was the last time you edited
"one".  The options local to a window are not remembered for each buffer.

                                                        *:setl* *:setlocal*
:setl[ocal] ...         Like ":set" but set only the value local to the
                        current buffer or window.  Not all options have a
                        local value.  If the option does not have a local
                        value the global value is set.
                        With the "all" argument: display local values for all
                        local options.
                        Without argument: Display local values for all local
                        options which are different from the default.
                        When displaying a specific local option, show the
                        local value.  For a global/local boolean option, when
                        the global value is being used, "--" is displayed
                        before the option name.
                        For a global option the global value is
                        shown (but that might change in the future).
                        {not in Vi}

:setl[ocal] {option}<   Set the local value of {option} to its global value by
                        copying the value.
                        {not in Vi}

:se[t] {option}<        Set the local value of {option} to its global value by
                        making it empty.  Only makes sense for |global-local|
                        options.
                        {not in Vi}

                                                        *:setg* *:setglobal*
:setg[lobal] ...        Like ":set" but set only the global value for a local
                        option without changing the local value.
                        When displaying an option, the global value is shown.
                        With the "all" argument: display global values for all
                        local options.
                        Without argument: display global values for all local
                        options which are different from the default.
                        {not in Vi}

For buffer-local and window-local options:
        Command          global value       local value ~
      :set option=value      set                set
 :setlocal option=value       -                 set
:setglobal option=value      set                 -
      :set option?            -                display
 :setlocal option?            -                display
:setglobal option?          display              -


Global options with a local value                       *global-local*

Options are global when you mostly use one value for all buffers and windows.
For some global options it's useful to sometimes have a different local value.
You can set the local value with ":setlocal".  That buffer or window will then
use the local value, while other buffers and windows continue using the global
value.

For example, you have two windows, both on C source code.  They use the global
'makeprg' option.  If you do this in one of the two windows: >
        :set makeprg=gmake
then the other window will switch to the same value.  There is no need to set
the 'makeprg' option in the other C source window too.
However, if you start editing a Perl file in a new window, you want to use
another 'makeprg' for it, without changing the value used for the C source
files.  You use this command: >
        :setlocal makeprg=perlmake
You can switch back to using the global value by making the local value empty: >
        :setlocal makeprg=
This only works for a string option.  For a boolean option you need to use the
"<" flag, like this: >
        :setlocal autoread<
Note that for non-boolean options using "<" copies the global value to the
local value, it doesn't switch back to using the global value (that matters
when the global value changes later).  You can also use: >
        :set path<
This will make the local value of 'path' empty, so that the global value is
used.  Thus it does the same as: >
        :setlocal path=
Note: In the future more global options can be made global-local.  Using
":setlocal" on a global option might work differently then.


Setting the filetype

:setf[iletype] {filetype}                       *:setf* *:setfiletype*
                        Set the 'filetype' option to {filetype}, but only if
                        not done yet in a sequence of (nested) autocommands.
                        This is short for: >
                                :if !did_filetype()
                                :  setlocal filetype={filetype}
                                :endif
<                       This command is used in a filetype.vim file to avoid
                        setting the 'filetype' option twice, causing different
                        settings and syntax files to be loaded.
                        {not in Vi}

                                *option-window* *optwin*
:bro[wse] se[t]                 *:set-browse* *:browse-set* *:opt* *:options*
:opt[ions]              Open a window for viewing and setting all options.
                        Options are grouped by function.
                        Offers short help for each option.  Hit <CR> on the
                        short help to open a help window with more help for
                        the option.
                        Modify the value of the option and hit <CR> on the
                        "set" line to set the new value.  For window and
                        buffer specific options, the last accessed window is
                        used to set the option value in, unless this is a help
                        window, in which case the window below help window is
                        used (skipping the option-window).
                        {not available when compiled without the |+eval| or
                        |+autocmd| features}

                                                                *$HOME*
Using "~" is like using "$HOME", but it is only recognized at the start of an
option and after a space or comma.

On Unix systems "~user" can be used too.  It is replaced by the home directory
of user "user".  Example: >
    :set path=~mool/include,/usr/include,.

On Unix systems the form "${HOME}" can be used too.  The name between {} can
contain non-id characters then.  Note that if you want to use this for the
"gf" command, you need to add the '{' and '}' characters to 'isfname'.

On MS-Windows, if $HOME is not defined as an environment variable, then
at runtime Vim will set it to the expansion of $HOMEDRIVE$HOMEPATH.

NOTE: expanding environment variables and "~/" is only done with the ":set"
command, not when assigning a value to an option with ":let".


Note the maximum length of an expanded option is limited.  How much depends on
the system, mostly it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.

                                                        *:fix* *:fixdel*
:fix[del]               Set the value of 't_kD':
                                't_kb' is     't_kD' becomes    ~
                                  CTRL-?        CTRL-H
                                not CTRL-?      CTRL-?

                        (CTRL-? is 0177 octal, 0x7f hex) {not in Vi}

                        If your delete key terminal code is wrong, but the
                        code for backspace is alright, you can put this in
                        your .vimrc: >
                                :fixdel
<                       This works no matter what the actual code for
                        backspace is.

                        If the backspace key terminal code is wrong you can
                        use this: >
                                :if &term == "termname"
                                :  set t_kb=^V<BS>
                                :  fixdel
                                :endif
<                       Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<BS>" is the backspace key
                        (don't type four characters!).  Replace "termname"
                        with your terminal name.

                        If your <Delete> key sends a strange key sequence (not
                        CTRL-? or CTRL-H) you cannot use ":fixdel".  Then use: >
                                :if &term == "termname"
                                :  set t_kD=^V<Delete>
                                :endif
<                       Where "^V" is CTRL-V and "<Delete>" is the delete key
                        (don't type eight characters!).  Replace "termname"
                        with your terminal name.

                                                        *Linux-backspace*
                        Note about Linux: By default the backspace key
                        produces CTRL-?, which is wrong.  You can fix it by
                        putting this line in your rc.local: >
                                echo "keycode 14 = BackSpace" | loadkeys
<
                                                        *NetBSD-backspace*
                        Note about NetBSD: If your backspace doesn't produce
                        the right code, try this: >
                                xmodmap -e "keycode 22 = BackSpace"
<                       If this works, add this in your .Xmodmap file: >
                                keysym 22 = BackSpace
<                       You need to restart for this to take effect.

==============================================================================
2. Automatically setting options                        *auto-setting*

Besides changing options with the ":set" command, there are three alternatives
to set options automatically for one or more files:

1. When starting Vim initializations are read from various places.  See
   |initialization|.  Most of them are performed for all editing sessions,
   and some of them depend on the directory where Vim is started.
   You can create an initialization file with |:mkvimrc|, |:mkview| and
   |:mksession|.
2. If you start editing a new file, the automatic commands are executed.
   This can be used to set options for files matching a particular pattern and
   many other things.  See |autocommand|.
3. If you start editing a new file, and the 'modeline' option is on, a
   number of lines at the beginning and end of the file are checked for
   modelines.  This is explained here.

                                        *modeline* *vim:* *vi:* *ex:* *E520*
There are two forms of modelines.  The first form:
        [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]{options}

[text]          any text or empty
{white}         at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
{vi:|vim:|ex:}  the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
[white]         optional white space
{options}       a list of option settings, separated with white space or ':',
                where each part between ':' is the argument for a ":set"
                command (can be empty)

Example:
   vi:noai:sw=3 ts=6 ~

The second form (this is compatible with some versions of Vi):

        [text]{white}{vi:|vim:|ex:}[white]se[t] {options}:[text]

[text]          any text or empty
{white}         at least one blank character (<Space> or <Tab>)
{vi:|vim:|ex:}  the string "vi:", "vim:" or "ex:"
[white]         optional white space
se[t]           the string "set " or "se " (note the space)
{options}       a list of options, separated with white space, which is the
                argument for a ":set" command
:               a colon
[text]          any text or empty

Example:
   /* vim: set ai tw=75: */ ~

The white space before {vi:|vim:|ex:} is required.  This minimizes the chance
that a normal word like "lex:" is caught.  There is one exception: "vi:" and
"vim:" can also be at the start of the line (for compatibility with version
3.0).  Using "ex:" at the start of the line will be ignored (this could be
short for "example:").

                                                        *modeline-local*
The options are set like with ":setlocal": The new value only applies to the
buffer and window that contain the file.  Although it's possible to set global
options from a modeline, this is unusual.  If you have two windows open and
the files in it set the same global option to a different value, the result
depends on which one was opened last.

When editing a file that was already loaded, only the window-local options
from the modeline are used.  Thus if you manually changed a buffer-local
option after opening the file, it won't be changed if you edit the same buffer
in another window.  But window-local options will be set.

                                                        *modeline-version*
If the modeline is only to be used for some versions of Vim, the version
number can be specified where "vim:" is used:
        vim{vers}:      version {vers} or later
        vim<{vers}:     version before {vers}
        vim={vers}:     version {vers}
        vim>{vers}:     version after {vers}
{vers} is 600 for Vim 6.0 (hundred times the major version plus minor).
For example, to use a modeline only for Vim 6.0 and later:
        /* vim600: set foldmethod=marker: */ ~
To use a modeline for Vim before version 5.7:
        /* vim<570: set sw=4: */ ~
There can be no blanks between "vim" and the ":".


The number of lines that are checked can be set with the 'modelines' option.
If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is 0 no lines are checked.

Note that for the first form all of the rest of the line is used, thus a line
like:
   /* vi:ts=4: */ ~
will give an error message for the trailing "*/".  This line is OK:
   /* vi:set ts=4: */ ~

If an error is detected the rest of the line is skipped.

If you want to include a ':' in a set command precede it with a '\'.  The
backslash in front of the ':' will be removed.  Example:
   /* vi:set dir=c\:\tmp: */ ~
This sets the 'dir' option to "c:\tmp".  Only a single backslash before the
':' is removed.  Thus to include "\:" you have to specify "\\:".

No other commands than "set" are supported, for security reasons (somebody
might create a Trojan horse text file with modelines).  And not all options
can be set.  For some options a flag is set, so that when it's used the
|sandbox| is effective.  Still, there is always a small risk that a modeline
causes trouble.  E.g., when some joker sets 'textwidth' to 5 all your lines
are wrapped unexpectedly.  So disable modelines before editing untrusted text.
The mail ftplugin does this, for example.

Hint: If you would like to do something else than setting an option, you could
define an autocommand that checks the file for a specific string.  For
example: >
        au BufReadPost * if getline(1) =~ "VAR" | call SetVar() | endif
And define a function SetVar() that does something with the line containing
"VAR".

==============================================================================
3. Options summary                                      *option-summary*

In the list below all the options are mentioned with their full name and with
an abbreviation if there is one.  Both forms may be used.

In this document when a boolean option is "set" that means that ":set option"
is entered.  When an option is "reset", ":set nooption" is used.

For some options there are two default values: The "Vim default", which is
used when 'compatible' is not set, and the "Vi default", which is used when
'compatible' is set.

Most options are the same in all windows and buffers.  There are a few that
are specific to how the text is presented in a window.  These can be set to a
different value in each window.  For example the 'list' option can be set in
one window and reset in another for the same text, giving both types of view
at the same time.  There are a few options that are specific to a certain
file.  These can have a different value for each file or buffer.  For example
the 'textwidth' option can be 78 for a normal text file and 0 for a C
program.

        global                  one option for all buffers and windows
        local to window         each window has its own copy of this option
        local to buffer         each buffer has its own copy of this option

When creating a new window the option values from the currently active window
are used as a default value for the window-specific options.  For the
buffer-specific options this depends on the 's' and 'S' flags in the
'cpoptions' option.  If 's' is included (which is the default) the values for
buffer options are copied from the currently active buffer when a buffer is
first entered.  If 'S' is present the options are copied each time the buffer
is entered, this is almost like having global options.  If 's' and 'S' are not
present, the options are copied from the currently active buffer when the
buffer is created.

Hidden options                                          *hidden-options*

Not all options are supported in all versions.  This depends on the supported
features and sometimes on the system.  A remark about this is in curly braces
below.  When an option is not supported it may still be set without getting an
error, this is called a hidden option.  You can't get the value of a hidden
option though, it is not stored.

To test if option "foo" can be used with ":set" use something like this: >
        if exists('&foo')
This also returns true for a hidden option.  To test if option "foo" is really
supported use something like this: >
        if exists('+foo')
<
                                                        *E355*
A jump table for the options with a short description can be found at |Q_op|.

                                        *'aleph'* *'al'* *aleph* *Aleph*
'aleph' 'al'            number  (default 128 for MS-DOS, 224 otherwise)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
                        feature}
        The ASCII code for the first letter of the Hebrew alphabet.  The
        routine that maps the keyboard in Hebrew mode, both in Insert mode
        (when hkmap is set) and on the command-line (when hitting CTRL-_)
        outputs the Hebrew characters in the range [aleph..aleph+26].
        aleph=128 applies to PC code, and aleph=224 applies to ISO 8859-8.
        See |rileft.txt|.

                        *'allowrevins'* *'ari'* *'noallowrevins'* *'noari'*
'allowrevins' 'ari'     boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
                        feature}
        Allow CTRL-_ in Insert and Command-line mode.  This is default off, to
        avoid that users that accidentally type CTRL-_ instead of SHIFT-_ get
        into reverse Insert mode, and don't know how to get out.  See
        'revins'.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                         *'altkeymap'* *'akm'* *'noaltkeymap'* *'noakm'*
'altkeymap' 'akm'       boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+farsi|
                        feature}
        When on, the second language is Farsi.  In editing mode CTRL-_ toggles
        the keyboard map between Farsi and English, when 'allowrevins' set.

        When off, the keyboard map toggles between Hebrew and English.  This
        is useful to start the Vim in native mode i.e. English (left-to-right
        mode) and have default second language Farsi or Hebrew (right-to-left
        mode).  See |farsi.txt|.

                                                *'ambiwidth'* *'ambw'*
'ambiwidth' 'ambw'      string (default: "single")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
                        feature}
        Only effective when 'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding.
        Tells Vim what to do with characters with East Asian Width Class
        Ambiguous (such as Euro, Registered Sign, Copyright Sign, Greek
        letters, Cyrillic letters).

        There are currently two possible values:
        "single":       Use the same width as characters in US-ASCII.  This is
                        expected by most users.
        "double":       Use twice the width of ASCII characters.
                                                        *E834* *E835*
        The value "double" cannot be used if 'listchars' or 'fillchars'
        contains a character that would be double width.

        There are a number of CJK fonts for which the width of glyphs for
        those characters are solely based on how many octets they take in
        legacy/traditional CJK encodings.  In those encodings, Euro,
        Registered sign, Greek/Cyrillic letters are represented by two octets,
        therefore those fonts have "wide" glyphs for them.  This is also
        true of some line drawing characters used to make tables in text
        file.  Therefore, when a CJK font is used for GUI Vim or
        Vim is running inside a terminal (emulators) that uses a CJK font
        (or Vim is run inside an xterm invoked with "-cjkwidth" option.),
        this option should be set to "double" to match the width perceived
        by Vim with the width of glyphs in the font.  Perhaps it also has
        to be set to "double" under CJK Windows 9x/ME or Windows 2k/XP
        when the system locale is set to one of CJK locales.  See Unicode
        Standard Annex #11 (http://www.unicode.org/reports/tr11).

                        *'antialias'* *'anti'* *'noantialias'* *'noanti'*
'antialias' 'anti'      boolean (default: off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with GUI enabled
                        on Mac OS X}
        This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim on Mac OS X
        v10.2 or later.  When on, Vim will use smooth ("antialiased") fonts,
        which can be easier to read at certain sizes on certain displays.
        Setting this option can sometimes cause problems if 'guifont' is set
        to its default (empty string).

                        *'autochdir'* *'acd'* *'noautochdir'* *'noacd'*
'autochdir' 'acd'       boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with it, use
                        exists("+autochdir") to check}
        When on, Vim will change the current working directory whenever you
        open a file, switch buffers, delete a buffer or open/close a window.
        It will change to the directory containing the file which was opened
        or selected.
        This option is provided for backward compatibility with the Vim
        released with Sun ONE Studio 4 Enterprise Edition.
        Note: When this option is on some plugins may not work.

                                *'arabic'* *'arab'* *'noarabic'* *'noarab'*
'arabic' 'arab'         boolean (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
                        feature}
        This option can be set to start editing Arabic text.
        Setting this option will:
        - Set the 'rightleft' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
        - Set the 'arabicshape' option, unless 'termbidi' is set.
        - Set the 'keymap' option to "arabic"; in Insert mode CTRL-^ toggles
          between typing English and Arabic key mapping.
        - Set the 'delcombine' option
        Note that 'encoding' must be "utf-8" for working with Arabic text.

        Resetting this option will:
        - Reset the 'rightleft' option.
        - Disable the use of 'keymap' (without changing its value).
        Note that 'arabicshape' and 'delcombine' are not reset (it is a global
        option.
        Also see |arabic.txt|.

                                        *'arabicshape'* *'arshape'*
                                        *'noarabicshape'* *'noarshape'*
'arabicshape' 'arshape' boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
                        feature}
        When on and 'termbidi' is off, the required visual character
        corrections that need to take place for displaying the Arabic language
        take affect.  Shaping, in essence, gets enabled; the term is a broad
        one which encompasses:
          a) the changing/morphing of characters based on their location
             within a word (initial, medial, final and stand-alone).
          b) the enabling of the ability to compose characters
          c) the enabling of the required combining of some characters
        When disabled the display shows each character's true stand-alone
        form.
        Arabic is a complex language which requires other settings, for
        further details see |arabic.txt|.

                        *'autoindent'* *'ai'* *'noautoindent'* *'noai'*
'autoindent' 'ai'       boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
        Copy indent from current line when starting a new line (typing <CR>
        in Insert mode or when using the "o" or "O" command).  If you do not
        type anything on the new line except <BS> or CTRL-D and then type
        <Esc>, CTRL-O or <CR>, the indent is deleted again.  Moving the cursor
        to another line has the same effect, unless the 'I' flag is included
        in 'cpoptions'.
        When autoindent is on, formatting (with the "gq" command or when you
        reach 'textwidth' in Insert mode) uses the indentation of the first
        line.
        When 'smartindent' or 'cindent' is on the indent is changed in
        a different way.
        The 'autoindent' option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
        {small difference from Vi: After the indent is deleted when typing
        <Esc> or <CR>, the cursor position when moving up or down is after the
        deleted indent; Vi puts the cursor somewhere in the deleted indent}.

                                 *'autoread'* *'ar'* *'noautoread'* *'noar'*
'autoread' 'ar'         boolean (default off)
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
        When a file has been detected to have been changed outside of Vim and
        it has not been changed inside of Vim, automatically read it again.
        When the file has been deleted this is not done.  |timestamp|
        If this option has a local value, use this command to switch back to
        using the global value: >
                :set autoread<
<
                                 *'autowrite'* *'aw'* *'noautowrite'* *'noaw'*
'autowrite' 'aw'        boolean (default off)
                        global
        Write the contents of the file, if it has been modified, on each
        :next, :rewind, :last, :first, :previous, :stop, :suspend, :tag, :!,
        :make, CTRL-] and CTRL-^ command; and when a :buffer, CTRL-O, CTRL-I,
        '{A-Z0-9}, or `{A-Z0-9} command takes one to another file.
        Note that for some commands the 'autowrite' option is not used, see
        'autowriteall' for that.

                         *'autowriteall'* *'awa'* *'noautowriteall'* *'noawa'*
'autowriteall' 'awa'    boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Like 'autowrite', but also used for commands ":edit", ":enew", ":quit",
        ":qall", ":exit", ":xit", ":recover" and closing the Vim window.
        Setting this option also implies that Vim behaves like 'autowrite' has
        been set.

                                                        *'background'* *'bg'*
'background' 'bg'       string  (default "dark" or "light", see below)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When set to "dark", Vim will try to use colors that look good on a
        dark background.  When set to "light", Vim will try to use colors that
        look good on a light background.  Any other value is illegal.
        Vim tries to set the default value according to the terminal used.
        This will not always be correct.
        Setting this option does not change the background color, it tells Vim
        what the background color looks like.  For changing the background
        color, see |:hi-normal|.

        When 'background' is set Vim will adjust the default color groups for
        the new value.  But the colors used for syntax highlighting will not
        change.                                 *g:colors_name*
        When a color scheme is loaded (the "g:colors_name" variable is set)
        setting 'background' will cause the color scheme to be reloaded.  If
        the color scheme adjusts to the value of 'background' this will work.
        However, if the color scheme sets 'background' itself the effect may
        be undone.  First delete the "g:colors_name" variable when needed.

        When setting 'background' to the default value with: >
                :set background&
<       Vim will guess the value.  In the GUI this should work correctly,
        in other cases Vim might not be able to guess the right value.

        When starting the GUI, the default value for 'background' will be
        "light".  When the value is not set in the .gvimrc, and Vim detects
        that the background is actually quite dark, 'background' is set to
        "dark".  But this happens only AFTER the .gvimrc file has been read
        (because the window needs to be opened to find the actual background
        color).  To get around this, force the GUI window to be opened by
        putting a ":gui" command in the .gvimrc file, before where the value
        of 'background' is used (e.g., before ":syntax on").

        For MS-DOS, Windows and OS/2 the default is "dark".
        For other systems "dark" is used when 'term' is "linux",
        "screen.linux", "cygwin" or "putty", or $COLORFGBG suggests a dark
        background.  Otherwise the default is "light".

        Normally this option would be set in the .vimrc file.  Possibly
        depending on the terminal name.  Example: >
                :if &term == "pcterm"
                :  set background=dark
                :endif
<       When this option is set, the default settings for the highlight groups
        will change.  To use other settings, place ":highlight" commands AFTER
        the setting of the 'background' option.
        This option is also used in the "$VIMRUNTIME/syntax/syntax.vim" file
        to select the colors for syntax highlighting.  After changing this
        option, you must load syntax.vim again to see the result.  This can be
        done with ":syntax on".

                                                        *'backspace'* *'bs'*
'backspace' 'bs'        string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Influences the working of <BS>, <Del>, CTRL-W and CTRL-U in Insert
        mode.  This is a list of items, separated by commas.  Each item allows
        a way to backspace over something:
        value   effect  ~
        indent  allow backspacing over autoindent
        eol     allow backspacing over line breaks (join lines)
        start   allow backspacing over the start of insert; CTRL-W and CTRL-U
                stop once at the start of insert.

        When the value is empty, Vi compatible backspacing is used.

        For backwards compatibility with version 5.4 and earlier:
        value   effect  ~
          0     same as ":set backspace=" (Vi compatible)
          1     same as ":set backspace=indent,eol"
          2     same as ":set backspace=indent,eol,start"

        See |:fixdel| if your <BS> or <Del> key does not do what you want.
        NOTE: This option is set to "" when 'compatible' is set.

                                *'backup'* *'bk'* *'nobackup'* *'nobk'*
'backup' 'bk'           boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Make a backup before overwriting a file.  Leave it around after the
        file has been successfully written.  If you do not want to keep the
        backup file, but you do want a backup while the file is being
        written, reset this option and set the 'writebackup' option (this is
        the default).  If you do not want a backup file at all reset both
        options (use this if your file system is almost full).  See the
        |backup-table| for more explanations.
        When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
        When 'patchmode' is set, the backup may be renamed to become the
        oldest version of a file.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'backupcopy'* *'bkc'*
'backupcopy' 'bkc'      string  (Vi default for Unix: "yes", otherwise: "auto")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When writing a file and a backup is made, this option tells how it's
        done.  This is a comma separated list of words.

        The main values are:
        "yes"   make a copy of the file and overwrite the original one
        "no"    rename the file and write a new one
        "auto"  one of the previous, what works best

        Extra values that can be combined with the ones above are:
        "breaksymlink"  always break symlinks when writing
        "breakhardlink" always break hardlinks when writing

        Making a copy and overwriting the original file:
        - Takes extra time to copy the file.
        + When the file has special attributes, is a (hard/symbolic) link or
          has a resource fork, all this is preserved.
        - When the file is a link the backup will have the name of the link,
          not of the real file.

        Renaming the file and writing a new one:
        + It's fast.
        - Sometimes not all attributes of the file can be copied to the new
          file.
        - When the file is a link the new file will not be a link.

        The "auto" value is the middle way: When Vim sees that renaming file
        is possible without side effects (the attributes can be passed on and
        the file is not a link) that is used.  When problems are expected, a
        copy will be made.

        The "breaksymlink" and "breakhardlink" values can be used in
        combination with any of "yes", "no" and "auto".  When included, they
        force Vim to always break either symbolic or hard links by doing
        exactly what the "no" option does, renaming the original file to
        become the backup and writing a new file in its place.  This can be
        useful for example in source trees where all the files are symbolic or
        hard links and any changes should stay in the local source tree, not
        be propagated back to the original source.
                                                        *crontab*
        One situation where "no" and "auto" will cause problems: A program
        that opens a file, invokes Vim to edit that file, and then tests if
        the open file was changed (through the file descriptor) will check the
        backup file instead of the newly created file.  "crontab -e" is an
        example.

        When a copy is made, the original file is truncated and then filled
        with the new text.  This means that protection bits, owner and
        symbolic links of the original file are unmodified.  The backup file
        however, is a new file, owned by the user who edited the file.  The
        group of the backup is set to the group of the original file.  If this
        fails, the protection bits for the group are made the same as for
        others.

        When the file is renamed this is the other way around: The backup has
        the same attributes of the original file, and the newly written file
        is owned by the current user.  When the file was a (hard/symbolic)
        link, the new file will not!  That's why the "auto" value doesn't
        rename when the file is a link.  The owner and group of the newly
        written file will be set to the same ones as the original file, but
        the system may refuse to do this.  In that case the "auto" value will
        again not rename the file.

                                                *'backupdir'* *'bdir'*
'backupdir' 'bdir'      string  (default for Amiga: ".,t:",
                                 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:/tmp,c:/temp"
                                 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,~/")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        List of directories for the backup file, separated with commas.
        - The backup file will be created in the first directory in the list
          where this is possible.  The directory must exist, Vim will not
          create it for you.
        - Empty means that no backup file will be created ('patchmode' is
          impossible!).  Writing may fail because of this.
        - A directory "." means to put the backup file in the same directory
          as the edited file.
        - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to
          put the backup file relative to where the edited file is.  The
          leading "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
          ("." inside a directory name has no special meaning).
        - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
          of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
          name, precede it with a backslash.
        - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
        - A directory name may end in an '/'.
        - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
          get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
            :set bdir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
<       - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
          of the option is removed.
        See also 'backup' and 'writebackup' options.
        If you want to hide your backup files on Unix, consider this value: >
                :set backupdir=./.backup,~/.backup,.,/tmp
<       You must create a ".backup" directory in each directory and in your
        home directory for this to work properly.
        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'backupext'* *'bex'* *E589*
'backupext' 'bex'       string  (default "~", for VMS: "_")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        String which is appended to a file name to make the name of the
        backup file.  The default is quite unusual, because this avoids
        accidentally overwriting existing files with a backup file.  You might
        prefer using ".bak", but make sure that you don't have files with
        ".bak" that you want to keep.
        Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

        If you like to keep a lot of backups, you could use a BufWritePre
        autocommand to change 'backupext' just before writing the file to
        include a timestamp. >
                :au BufWritePre * let &bex = '-' . strftime("%Y%b%d%X") . '~'
<       Use 'backupdir' to put the backup in a different directory.

                                                *'backupskip'* *'bsk'*
'backupskip' 'bsk'      string  (default: "/tmp/*,$TMPDIR/*,$TMP/*,$TEMP/*")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
                        feature}
        A list of file patterns.  When one of the patterns matches with the
        name of the file which is written, no backup file is created.  Both
        the specified file name and the full path name of the file are used.
        The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
        Watch out for special characters, see |option-backslash|.
        When $TMPDIR, $TMP or $TEMP is not defined, it is not used for the
        default value.  "/tmp/*" is only used for Unix.

        Note that environment variables are not expanded.  If you want to use
        $HOME you must expand it explicitly, e.g.: >
                :let backupskip = escape(expand('$HOME'), '\') . '/tmp/*'

<       Note that the default also makes sure that "crontab -e" works (when a
        backup would be made by renaming the original file crontab won't see
        the newly created file).  Also see 'backupcopy' and |crontab|.

                                                *'balloondelay'* *'bdlay'*
'balloondelay' 'bdlay'  number  (default: 600)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
                        feature}
        Delay in milliseconds before a balloon may pop up.  See |balloon-eval|.

                       *'ballooneval'* *'beval'* *'noballooneval'* *'nobeval'*
'ballooneval' 'beval'   boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
                        feature}
        Switch on the |balloon-eval| functionality.

                                                     *'balloonexpr'* *'bexpr'*
'balloonexpr' 'bexpr'   string  (default "")
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+balloon_eval|
                        feature}
        Expression for text to show in evaluation balloon.  It is only used
        when 'ballooneval' is on.  These variables can be used:

        v:beval_bufnr   number of the buffer in which balloon is going to show
        v:beval_winnr   number of the window
        v:beval_lnum    line number
        v:beval_col     column number (byte index)
        v:beval_text    word under or after the mouse pointer

        The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects!
        Example: >
    function! MyBalloonExpr()
        return 'Cursor is at line ' . v:beval_lnum .
                \', column ' . v:beval_col .
                \ ' of file ' .  bufname(v:beval_bufnr) .
                \ ' on word "' . v:beval_text . '"'
    endfunction
    set bexpr=MyBalloonExpr()
    set ballooneval
<
        NOTE: The balloon is displayed only if the cursor is on a text
        character.  If the result of evaluating 'balloonexpr' is not empty,
        Vim does not try to send a message to an external debugger (Netbeans
        or Sun Workshop).

        The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
        |sandbox-option|.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        evaluating 'balloonexpr' |textlock|.

        To check whether line breaks in the balloon text work use this check: >
                if has("balloon_multiline")
<       When they are supported "\n" characters will start a new line.  If the
        expression evaluates to a |List| this is equal to using each List item
        as a string and putting "\n" in between them.

                                     *'binary'* *'bin'* *'nobinary'* *'nobin'*
'binary' 'bin'          boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        This option should be set before editing a binary file.  You can also
        use the |-b| Vim argument.  When this option is switched on a few
        options will be changed (also when it already was on):
                'textwidth'  will be set to 0
                'wrapmargin' will be set to 0
                'modeline'   will be off
                'expandtab'  will be off
        Also, 'fileformat' and 'fileformats' options will not be used, the
        file is read and written like 'fileformat' was "unix" (a single <NL>
        separates lines).
        The 'fileencoding' and 'fileencodings' options will not be used, the
        file is read without conversion.
        NOTE: When you start editing a(nother) file while the 'bin' option is
        on, settings from autocommands may change the settings again (e.g.,
        'textwidth'), causing trouble when editing.  You might want to set
        'bin' again when the file has been loaded.
        The previous values of these options are remembered and restored when
        'bin' is switched from on to off.  Each buffer has its own set of
        saved option values.
        To edit a file with 'binary' set you can use the |++bin| argument.
        This avoids you have to do ":set bin", which would have effect for all
        files you edit.
        When writing a file the <EOL> for the last line is only written if
        there was one in the original file (normally Vim appends an <EOL> to
        the last line if there is none; this would make the file longer).  See
        the 'endofline' option.

                        *'bioskey'* *'biosk'* *'nobioskey'* *'nobiosk'*
'bioskey' 'biosk'       boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}  {only for MS-DOS}
        When on the BIOS is called to obtain a keyboard character.  This works
        better to detect CTRL-C, but only works for the console.  When using a
        terminal over a serial port reset this option.
        Also see |'conskey'|.

                                                        *'bomb'* *'nobomb'*
'bomb'                  boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
                        feature}
        When writing a file and the following conditions are met, a BOM (Byte
        Order Mark) is prepended to the file:
        - this option is on
        - the 'binary' option is off
        - 'fileencoding' is "utf-8", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" or one of the little/big
          endian variants.
        Some applications use the BOM to recognize the encoding of the file.
        Often used for UCS-2 files on MS-Windows.  For other applications it
        causes trouble, for example: "cat file1 file2" makes the BOM of file2
        appear halfway the resulting file.  Gcc doesn't accept a BOM.
        When Vim reads a file and 'fileencodings' starts with "ucs-bom", a
        check for the presence of the BOM is done and 'bomb' set accordingly.
        Unless 'binary' is set, it is removed from the first line, so that you
        don't see it when editing.  When you don't change the options, the BOM
        will be restored when writing the file.

                                                *'breakat'* *'brk'*
'breakat' 'brk'         string  (default " ^I!@*-+;:,./?")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
                        feature}
        This option lets you choose which characters might cause a line
        break if 'linebreak' is on.  Only works for ASCII and also for 8-bit
        characters when 'encoding' is an 8-bit encoding.

                                                *'browsedir'* *'bsdir'*
'browsedir' 'bsdir'     string  (default: "last")
                        global
                        {not in Vi} {only for Motif, Athena, GTK, Mac and
                        Win32 GUI}
        Which directory to use for the file browser:
           last         Use same directory as with last file browser, where a
                        file was opened or saved.
           buffer       Use the directory of the related buffer.
           current      Use the current directory.
           {path}       Use the specified directory

                                                *'bufhidden'* *'bh'*
'bufhidden' 'bh'        string (default: "")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
                        feature}
        This option specifies what happens when a buffer is no longer
        displayed in a window:
          <empty>       follow the global 'hidden' option
          hide          hide the buffer (don't unload it), also when 'hidden'
                        is not set
          unload        unload the buffer, also when 'hidden' is set or using
                        |:hide|
          delete        delete the buffer from the buffer list, also when
                        'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
                        |:bdelete|
          wipe          wipe out the buffer from the buffer list, also when
                        'hidden' is set or using |:hide|, like using
                        |:bwipeout|

        CAREFUL: when "unload", "delete" or "wipe" is used changes in a buffer
        are lost without a warning.  Also, these values may break autocommands
        that switch between buffers temporarily.
        This option is used together with 'buftype' and 'swapfile' to specify
        special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.

                        *'buflisted'* *'bl'* *'nobuflisted'* *'nobl'* *E85*
'buflisted' 'bl'        boolean (default: on)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        When this option is set, the buffer shows up in the buffer list.  If
        it is reset it is not used for ":bnext", "ls", the Buffers menu, etc.
        This option is reset by Vim for buffers that are only used to remember
        a file name or marks.  Vim sets it when starting to edit a buffer.
        But not when moving to a buffer with ":buffer".

                                                *'buftype'* *'bt'* *E382*
'buftype' 'bt'          string (default: "")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
                        feature}
        The value of this option specifies the type of a buffer:
          <empty>       normal buffer
          nofile        buffer which is not related to a file and will not be
                        written
          nowrite       buffer which will not be written
          acwrite       buffer which will always be written with BufWriteCmd
                        autocommands. {not available when compiled without the
                        |+autocmd| feature}
          quickfix      quickfix buffer, contains list of errors |:cwindow|
                        or list of locations |:lwindow|
          help          help buffer (you are not supposed to set this
                        manually)

        This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'swapfile' to
        specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.

        Be careful with changing this option, it can have many side effects!

        A "quickfix" buffer is only used for the error list and the location
        list.  This value is set by the |:cwindow| and |:lwindow| commands and
        you are not supposed to change it.

        "nofile" and "nowrite" buffers are similar:
        both:           The buffer is not to be written to disk, ":w" doesn't
                        work (":w filename" does work though).
        both:           The buffer is never considered to be |'modified'|.
                        There is no warning when the changes will be lost, for
                        example when you quit Vim.
        both:           A swap file is only created when using too much memory
                        (when 'swapfile' has been reset there is never a swap
                        file).
        nofile only:    The buffer name is fixed, it is not handled like a
                        file name.  It is not modified in response to a |:cd|
                        command.
                                                        *E676*
        "acwrite" implies that the buffer name is not related to a file, like
        "nofile", but it will be written.  Thus, in contrast to "nofile" and
        "nowrite", ":w" does work and a modified buffer can't be abandoned
        without saving.  For writing there must be matching |BufWriteCmd|,
        |FileWriteCmd| or |FileAppendCmd| autocommands.

                                                *'casemap'* *'cmp'*
'casemap' 'cmp'         string  (default: "internal,keepascii")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
                        feature}
        Specifies details about changing the case of letters.  It may contain
        these words, separated by a comma:
        internal        Use internal case mapping functions, the current
                        locale does not change the case mapping.  This only
                        matters when 'encoding' is a Unicode encoding,
                        "latin1" or "iso-8859-15".  When "internal" is
                        omitted, the towupper() and towlower() system library
                        functions are used when available.
        keepascii       For the ASCII characters (0x00 to 0x7f) use the US
                        case mapping, the current locale is not effective.
                        This probably only matters for Turkish.

                                                *'cdpath'* *'cd'* *E344* *E346*
'cdpath' 'cd'           string  (default: equivalent to $CDPATH or ",,")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the
                        |+file_in_path| feature}
        This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
        |:cd| and |:lcd| commands, provided that the directory being searched
        for has a relative path, not an absolute part starting with "/", "./"
        or "../", the 'cdpath' option is not used then.
        The 'cdpath' option's value has the same form and semantics as
        |'path'|.  Also see |file-searching|.
        The default value is taken from $CDPATH, with a "," prepended to look
        in the current directory first.
        If the default value taken from $CDPATH is not what you want, include
        a modified version of the following command in your vimrc file to
        override it: >
          :let &cdpath = ',' . substitute(substitute($CDPATH, '[, ]', '\\\0', 'g'), ':', ',', 'g')
<       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.
        (parts of 'cdpath' can be passed to the shell to expand file names).

                                                *'cedit'*
'cedit'                 string  (Vi default: "", Vim default: CTRL-F)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
                        feature}
        The key used in Command-line Mode to open the command-line window.
        The default is CTRL-F when 'compatible' is off.
        Only non-printable keys are allowed.
        The key can be specified as a single character, but it is difficult to
        type.  The preferred way is to use the <> notation.  Examples: >
                :set cedit=<C-Y>
                :set cedit=<Esc>
<       |Nvi| also has this option, but it only uses the first character.
        See |cmdwin|.

                                *'charconvert'* *'ccv'* *E202* *E214* *E513*
'charconvert' 'ccv'     string (default "")
                        global
                        {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
                        and |+eval| features}
                        {not in Vi}
        An expression that is used for character encoding conversion.  It is
        evaluated when a file that is to be read or has been written has a
        different encoding from what is desired.
        'charconvert' is not used when the internal iconv() function is
        supported and is able to do the conversion.  Using iconv() is
        preferred, because it is much faster.
        'charconvert' is not used when reading stdin |--|, because there is no
        file to convert from.  You will have to save the text in a file first.
        The expression must return zero or an empty string for success,
        non-zero for failure.
        The possible encoding names encountered are in 'encoding'.
        Additionally, names given in 'fileencodings' and 'fileencoding' are
        used.
        Conversion between "latin1", "unicode", "ucs-2", "ucs-4" and "utf-8"
        is done internally by Vim, 'charconvert' is not used for this.
        'charconvert' is also used to convert the viminfo file, if the 'c'
        flag is present in 'viminfo'.  Also used for Unicode conversion.
        Example: >
                set charconvert=CharConvert()
                fun CharConvert()
                  system("recode "
                        \ . v:charconvert_from . ".." . v:charconvert_to
                        \ . " <" . v:fname_in . " >" v:fname_out)
                  return v:shell_error
                endfun
<       The related Vim variables are:
                v:charconvert_from      name of the current encoding
                v:charconvert_to        name of the desired encoding
                v:fname_in              name of the input file
                v:fname_out             name of the output file
        Note that v:fname_in and v:fname_out will never be the same.
        Note that v:charconvert_from and v:charconvert_to may be different
        from 'encoding'.  Vim internally uses UTF-8 instead of UCS-2 or UCS-4.
        Encryption is not done by Vim when using 'charconvert'.  If you want
        to encrypt the file after conversion, 'charconvert' should take care
        of this.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                   *'cindent'* *'cin'* *'nocindent'* *'nocin'*
'cindent' 'cin'         boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
                        feature}
        Enables automatic C program indenting.  See 'cinkeys' to set the keys
        that trigger reindenting in insert mode and 'cinoptions' to set your
        preferred indent style.
        If 'indentexpr' is not empty, it overrules 'cindent'.
        If 'lisp' is not on and both 'indentexpr' and 'equalprg' are empty,
        the "=" operator indents using this algorithm rather than calling an
        external program.
        See |C-indenting|.
        When you don't like the way 'cindent' works, try the 'smartindent'
        option or 'indentexpr'.
        This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                                        *'cinkeys'* *'cink'*
'cinkeys' 'cink'        string  (default "0{,0},0),:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
                        feature}
        A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
        the current line.  Only used if 'cindent' is on and 'indentexpr' is
        empty.
        For the format of this option see |cinkeys-format|.
        See |C-indenting|.

                                                *'cinoptions'* *'cino'*
'cinoptions' 'cino'     string  (default "")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
                        feature}
        The 'cinoptions' affect the way 'cindent' reindents lines in a C
        program.  See |cinoptions-values| for the values of this option, and
        |C-indenting| for info on C indenting in general.


                                                *'cinwords'* *'cinw'*
'cinwords' 'cinw'       string  (default "if,else,while,do,for,switch")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without both the
                        |+cindent| and the |+smartindent| features}
        These keywords start an extra indent in the next line when
        'smartindent' or 'cindent' is set.  For 'cindent' this is only done at
        an appropriate place (inside {}).
        Note that 'ignorecase' isn't used for 'cinwords'.  If case doesn't
        matter, include the keyword both the uppercase and lowercase:
        "if,If,IF".

                                                *'clipboard'* *'cb'*
'clipboard' 'cb'        string  (default "autoselect,exclude:cons\|linux"
                                                  for X-windows, "" otherwise)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only in GUI versions or when the |+xterm_clipboard|
                        feature is included}
        This option is a list of comma separated names.
        These names are recognized:

        unnamed         When included, Vim will use the clipboard register '*'
                        for all yank, delete, change and put operations which
                        would normally go to the unnamed register.  When a
                        register is explicitly specified, it will always be
                        used regardless of whether "unnamed" is in 'clipboard'
                        or not.  The clipboard register can always be
                        explicitly accessed using the "* notation.  Also see
                        |gui-clipboard|.

        unnamedplus     A variant of "unnamed" flag which uses the clipboard
                        register '+' (|quoteplus|) instead of register '*' for
                        all operations except yank.  Yank shall copy the text
                        into register '+' and also into '*' when "unnamed" is
                        included.
                        Only available with the |+X11| feature.
                        Availability can be checked with: >
                                if has('unnamedplus')
<
        autoselect      Works like the 'a' flag in 'guioptions': If present,
                        then whenever Visual mode is started, or the Visual
                        area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of the
                        windowing system's global selection or put the
                        selected text on the clipboard used by the selection
                        register "*.  See |guioptions_a| and |quotestar| for
                        details.  When the GUI is active, the 'a' flag in
                        'guioptions' is used, when the GUI is not active, this
                        "autoselect" flag is used.
                        Also applies to the modeless selection.

        autoselectml    Like "autoselect", but for the modeless selection
                        only.  Compare to the 'A' flag in 'guioptions'.

        html            When the clipboard contains HTML, use this when
                        pasting.  When putting text on the clipboard, mark it
                        as HTML.  This works to copy rendered HTML from
                        Firefox, paste it as raw HTML in Vim, select the HTML
                        in Vim and paste it in a rich edit box in Firefox.
                        You probably want to add this only temporarily,
                        possibly use BufEnter autocommands.
                        Only supported for GTK version 2 and later.
                        Only available with the |+multi_byte| feature.

        exclude:{pattern}
                        Defines a pattern that is matched against the name of
                        the terminal 'term'.  If there is a match, no
                        connection will be made to the X server.  This is
                        useful in this situation:
                        - Running Vim in a console.
                        - $DISPLAY is set to start applications on another
                          display.
                        - You do not want to connect to the X server in the
                          console, but do want this in a terminal emulator.
                        To never connect to the X server use: >
                                exclude:.*
<                       This has the same effect as using the |-X| argument.
                        Note that when there is no connection to the X server
                        the window title won't be restored and the clipboard
                        cannot be accessed.
                        The value of 'magic' is ignored, {pattern} is
                        interpreted as if 'magic' was on.
                        The rest of the option value will be used for
                        {pattern}, this must be the last entry.

                                                *'cmdheight'* *'ch'*
'cmdheight' 'ch'        number  (default 1)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Number of screen lines to use for the command-line.  Helps avoiding
        |hit-enter| prompts.
        The value of this option is stored with the tab page, so that each tab
        page can have a different value.

                                                *'cmdwinheight'* *'cwh'*
'cmdwinheight' 'cwh'    number  (default 7)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
                        feature}
        Number of screen lines to use for the command-line window. |cmdwin|

                                                *'colorcolumn'* *'cc'*
'colorcolumn' 'cc'      string  (default "")
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
                        feature}
        'colorcolumn' is a comma separated list of screen columns that are
        highlighted with ColorColumn |hl-ColorColumn|.  Useful to align
        text.  Will make screen redrawing slower.
        The screen column can be an absolute number, or a number preceded with
        '+' or '-', which is added to or subtracted from 'textwidth'. >

                :set cc=+1  " highlight column after 'textwidth'
                :set cc=+1,+2,+3  " highlight three columns after 'textwidth'
                :hi ColorColumn ctermbg=lightgrey guibg=lightgrey
<
        When 'textwidth' is zero then the items with '-' and '+' are not used.
        A maximum of 256 columns are highlighted.

                                                *'columns'* *'co'* *E594*
'columns' 'co'          number  (default 80 or terminal width)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Number of columns of the screen.  Normally this is set by the terminal
        initialization and does not have to be set by hand.  Also see
        |posix-screen-size|.
        When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
        option will cause the window size to be changed.  When you only want
        to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
        When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
        number of columns of the display, the display may be messed up.  For
        the GUI it is always possible and Vim limits the number of columns to
        what fits on the screen.  You can use this command to get the widest
        window possible: >
                :set columns=9999
<       Minimum value is 12, maximum value is 10000.

                                        *'comments'* *'com'* *E524* *E525*
'comments' 'com'        string  (default
                                "s1:/*,mb:*,ex:*/,://,b:#,:%,:XCOMM,n:>,fb:-")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+comments|
                        feature}
        A comma separated list of strings that can start a comment line.  See
        |format-comments|.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes to
        insert a space.

                                        *'commentstring'* *'cms'* *E537*
'commentstring' 'cms'   string  (default "/*%s*/")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        A template for a comment.  The "%s" in the value is replaced with the
        comment text.  Currently only used to add markers for folding, see
        |fold-marker|.

                        *'compatible'* *'cp'* *'nocompatible'* *'nocp'*
'compatible' 'cp'       boolean (default on, off when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc|
                                                                file is found)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        This option has the effect of making Vim either more Vi-compatible, or
        make Vim behave in a more useful way.
        This is a special kind of option, because when it's set or reset,
        other options are also changed as a side effect.  CAREFUL: Setting or
        resetting this option can have a lot of unexpected effects: Mappings
        are interpreted in another way, undo behaves differently, etc.  If you
        set this option in your vimrc file, you should probably put it at the
        very start.
        By default this option is on and the Vi defaults are used for the
        options.  This default was chosen for those people who want to use Vim
        just like Vi, and don't even (want to) know about the 'compatible'
        option.
        When a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file is found while Vim is starting up,
        this option is switched off, and all options that have not been
        modified will be set to the Vim defaults.  Effectively, this means
        that when a |vimrc| or |gvimrc| file exists, Vim will use the Vim
        defaults, otherwise it will use the Vi defaults.  (Note: This doesn't
        happen for the system-wide vimrc or gvimrc file, nor for a file given
        with the |-u| argument).  Also see |compatible-default| and
        |posix-compliance|.
        You can also set this option with the "-C" argument, and reset it with
        "-N".  See |-C| and |-N|.
        Switching this option off makes the Vim defaults be used for options
        that have a different Vi and Vim default value.  See the options
        marked with a '+' below.  Other options are not modified.
        At the moment this option is set, several other options will be set
        or reset to make Vim as Vi-compatible as possible.  See the table
        below.  This can be used if you want to revert to Vi compatible
        editing.
        See also 'cpoptions'.

        option          + set value     effect  ~

        'allowrevins'     off           no CTRL-_ command
        'backupcopy'      Unix: "yes"     backup file is a copy
                          others: "auto"  copy or rename backup file
        'backspace'       ""            normal backspace
        'backup'          off           no backup file
        'cindent'         off           no C code indentation
        'cedit'         + ""            no key to open the |cmdwin|
        'cpoptions'     + (all flags)   Vi-compatible flags
        'cscopetag'       off           don't use cscope for ":tag"
        'cscopetagorder'  0             see |cscopetagorder|
        'cscopeverbose'   off           see |cscopeverbose|
        'digraph'         off           no digraphs
        'esckeys'       + off           no <Esc>-keys in Insert mode
        'expandtab'       off           tabs not expanded to spaces
        'fileformats'   + ""            no automatic file format detection,
                          "dos,unix"    except for DOS, Windows and OS/2
        'formatoptions' + "vt"          Vi compatible formatting
        'gdefault'        off           no default 'g' flag for ":s"
        'history'       + 0             no commandline history
        'hkmap'           off           no Hebrew keyboard mapping
        'hkmapp'          off           no phonetic Hebrew keyboard mapping
        'hlsearch'        off           no highlighting of search matches
        'incsearch'       off           no incremental searching
        'indentexpr'      ""            no indenting by expression
        'insertmode'      off           do not start in Insert mode
        'iskeyword'     + "@,48-57,_"   keywords contain alphanumeric
                                                characters and '_'
        'joinspaces'      on            insert 2 spaces after period
        'modeline'      + off           no modelines
        'more'          + off           no pauses in listings
        'revins'          off           no reverse insert
        'ruler'           off           no ruler
        'scrolljump'      1             no jump scroll
        'scrolloff'       0             no scroll offset
        'shiftround'      off           indent not rounded to shiftwidth
        'shortmess'     + ""            no shortening of messages
        'showcmd'       + off           command characters not shown
        'showmode'      + off           current mode not shown
        'smartcase'       off           no automatic ignore case switch
        'smartindent'     off           no smart indentation
        'smarttab'        off           no smart tab size
        'softtabstop'     0             tabs are always 'tabstop' positions
        'startofline'     on            goto startofline with some commands
        'tagrelative'   + off           tag file names are not relative
        'textauto'      + off           no automatic textmode detection
        'textwidth'       0             no automatic line wrap
        'tildeop'         off           tilde is not an operator
        'ttimeout'        off           no terminal timeout
        'whichwrap'     + ""            left-right movements don't wrap
        'wildchar'      + CTRL-E        only when the current value is <Tab>
                                        use CTRL-E for cmdline completion
        'writebackup'     on or off     depends on the |+writebackup| feature

                                                *'complete'* *'cpt'* *E535*
'complete' 'cpt'        string  (default: ".,w,b,u,t,i")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        This option specifies how keyword completion |ins-completion| works
        when CTRL-P or CTRL-N are used.  It is also used for whole-line
        completion |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-L|.  It indicates the type of completion
        and the places to scan.  It is a comma separated list of flags:
        .       scan the current buffer ('wrapscan' is ignored)
        w       scan buffers from other windows
        b       scan other loaded buffers that are in the buffer list
        u       scan the unloaded buffers that are in the buffer list
        U       scan the buffers that are not in the buffer list
        k       scan the files given with the 'dictionary' option
        kspell  use the currently active spell checking |spell|
        k{dict} scan the file {dict}.  Several "k" flags can be given,
                patterns are valid too.  For example: >
                        :set cpt=k/usr/dict/*,k~/spanish
<       s       scan the files given with the 'thesaurus' option
        s{tsr}  scan the file {tsr}.  Several "s" flags can be given, patterns
                are valid too.
        i       scan current and included files
        d       scan current and included files for defined name or macro
                |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-D|
        ]       tag completion
        t       same as "]"

        Unloaded buffers are not loaded, thus their autocmds |:autocmd| are
        not executed, this may lead to unexpected completions from some files
        (gzipped files for example).  Unloaded buffers are not scanned for
        whole-line completion.

        The default is ".,w,b,u,t,i", which means to scan:
           1. the current buffer
           2. buffers in other windows
           3. other loaded buffers
           4. unloaded buffers
           5. tags
           6. included files

        As you can see, CTRL-N and CTRL-P can be used to do any 'iskeyword'-
        based expansion (e.g., dictionary |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|, included patterns
        |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-I|, tags |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-]| and normal expansions).

                                                *'completefunc'* *'cfu'*
'completefunc' 'cfu'    string  (default: empty)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+eval|
                        or |+insert_expand| features}
        This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode completion
        with CTRL-X CTRL-U. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-U|
        See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is
        invoked and what it should return.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'completeopt'* *'cot'*
'completeopt' 'cot'     string  (default: "menu,preview")
                        global
                        {not available when compiled without the
                        |+insert_expand| feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        A comma separated list of options for Insert mode completion
        |ins-completion|.  The supported values are:

           menu     Use a popup menu to show the possible completions.  The
                    menu is only shown when there is more than one match and
                    sufficient colors are available.  |ins-completion-menu|

           menuone  Use the popup menu also when there is only one match.
                    Useful when there is additional information about the
                    match, e.g., what file it comes from.

           longest  Only insert the longest common text of the matches.  If
                    the menu is displayed you can use CTRL-L to add more
                    characters.  Whether case is ignored depends on the kind
                    of completion.  For buffer text the 'ignorecase' option is
                    used.

           preview  Show extra information about the currently selected
                    completion in the preview window.  Only works in
                    combination with "menu" or "menuone".


                                                *'concealcursor'* *'cocu'*
'concealcursor' 'cocu'  string (default: "")
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+conceal|
                        feature}
        Sets the modes in which text in the cursor line can also be concealed.
        When the current mode is listed then concealing happens just like in
        other lines.
          n             Normal mode
          v             Visual mode
          i             Insert mode
          c             Command line editing, for 'incsearch'

        'v' applies to all lines in the Visual area, not only the cursor.
        A useful value is "nc".  This is used in help files.  So long as you
        are moving around text is concealed, but when starting to insert text
        or selecting a Visual area the concealed text is displayed, so that
        you can see what you are doing.
        Keep in mind that the cursor position is not always where it's
        displayed.  E.g., when moving vertically it may change column.


'conceallevel' 'cole'           *'conceallevel'* *'cole'*
                        number (default 0)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+conceal|
                        feature}
        Determine how text with the "conceal" syntax attribute |:syn-conceal|
        is shown:

        Value           Effect ~
        0               Text is shown normally
        1               Each block of concealed text is replaced with one
                        character.  If the syntax item does not have a custom
                        replacement character defined (see |:syn-cchar|) the
                        character defined in 'listchars' is used (default is a
                        space).
                        It is highlighted with the "Conceal" highlight group.
        2               Concealed text is completely hidden unless it has a
                        custom replacement character defined (see
                        |:syn-cchar|).
        3               Concealed text is completely hidden.

        Note: in the cursor line concealed text is not hidden, so that you can
        edit and copy the text.  This can be changed with the 'concealcursor'
        option.

                                *'confirm'* *'cf'* *'noconfirm'* *'nocf'*
'confirm' 'cf'          boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When 'confirm' is on, certain operations that would normally
        fail because of unsaved changes to a buffer, e.g. ":q" and ":e",
        instead raise a |dialog| asking if you wish to save the current
        file(s).  You can still use a ! to unconditionally |abandon| a buffer.
        If 'confirm' is off you can still activate confirmation for one
        command only (this is most useful in mappings) with the |:confirm|
        command.
        Also see the |confirm()| function and the 'v' flag in 'guioptions'.

                        *'conskey'* *'consk'* *'noconskey'* *'noconsk'*
'conskey' 'consk'       boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}  {only for MS-DOS}
        When on direct console I/O is used to obtain a keyboard character.
        This should work in most cases.  Also see |'bioskey'|.  Together,
        three methods of console input are available:
        'conskey'   'bioskey'       action ~
           on        on or off      direct console input
           off          on          BIOS
           off          off         STDIN

                        *'copyindent'* *'ci'* *'nocopyindent'* *'noci'*
'copyindent' 'ci'       boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        Copy the structure of the existing lines indent when autoindenting a
        new line.  Normally the new indent is reconstructed by a series of
        tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is enabled,
        in which case only spaces are used).  Enabling this option makes the
        new line copy whatever characters were used for indenting on the
        existing line.  'expandtab' has no effect on these characters, a Tab
        remains a Tab.  If the new indent is greater than on the existing
        line, the remaining space is filled in the normal manner.
        NOTE: 'copyindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
        Also see 'preserveindent'.

                                                *'cpoptions'* *'cpo'*
'cpoptions' 'cpo'       string  (Vim default: "aABceFs",
                                 Vi default:  all flags)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        A sequence of single character flags.  When a character is present
        this indicates vi-compatible behavior.  This is used for things where
        not being vi-compatible is mostly or sometimes preferred.
        'cpoptions' stands for "compatible-options".
        Commas can be added for readability.
        To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
        "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.
        NOTE: This option is set to the POSIX default value at startup when
        the Vi default value would be used and the $VIM_POSIX environment
        variable exists |posix|.  This means Vim tries to behave like the
        POSIX specification.

            contains    behavior        ~
                                                                *cpo-a*
                a       When included, a ":read" command with a file name
                        argument will set the alternate file name for the
                        current window.
                                                                *cpo-A*
                A       When included, a ":write" command with a file name
                        argument will set the alternate file name for the
                        current window.
                                                                *cpo-b*
                b       "\|" in a ":map" command is recognized as the end of
                        the map command.  The '\' is included in the mapping,
                        the text after the '|' is interpreted as the next
                        command.  Use a CTRL-V instead of a backslash to
                        include the '|' in the mapping.  Applies to all
                        mapping, abbreviation, menu and autocmd commands.
                        See also |map_bar|.
                                                                *cpo-B*
                B       A backslash has no special meaning in mappings,
                        abbreviations and the "to" part of the menu commands.
                        Remove this flag to be able to use a backslash like a
                        CTRL-V.  For example, the command ":map X \<Esc>"
                        results in X being mapped to:
                                'B' included:   "\^["    (^[ is a real <Esc>)
                                'B' excluded:   "<Esc>"  (5 characters)
                                ('<' excluded in both cases)
                                                                *cpo-c*
                c       Searching continues at the end of any match at the
                        cursor position, but not further than the start of the
                        next line.  When not present searching continues
                        one character from the cursor position.  With 'c'
                        "abababababab" only gets three matches when repeating
                        "/abab", without 'c' there are five matches.
                                                                *cpo-C*
                C       Do not concatenate sourced lines that start with a
                        backslash.  See |line-continuation|.
                                                                *cpo-d*
                d       Using "./" in the 'tags' option doesn't mean to use
                        the tags file relative to the current file, but the
                        tags file in the current directory.
                                                                *cpo-D*
                D       Can't use CTRL-K to enter a digraph after Normal mode
                        commands with a character argument, like |r|, |f| and
                        |t|.
                                                                *cpo-e*
                e       When executing a register with ":@r", always add a
                        <CR> to the last line, also when the register is not
                        linewise.  If this flag is not present, the register
                        is not linewise and the last line does not end in a
                        <CR>, then the last line is put on the command-line
                        and can be edited before hitting <CR>.
                                                                *cpo-E*
                E       It is an error when using "y", "d", "c", "g~", "gu" or
                        "gU" on an Empty region.  The operators only work when
                        at least one character is to be operate on.  Example:
                        This makes "y0" fail in the first column.
                                                                *cpo-f*
                f       When included, a ":read" command with a file name
                        argument will set the file name for the current buffer,
                        if the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet.
                                                                *cpo-F*
                F       When included, a ":write" command with a file name
                        argument will set the file name for the current
                        buffer, if the current buffer doesn't have a file name
                        yet.  Also see |cpo-P|.
                                                                *cpo-g*
                g       Goto line 1 when using ":edit" without argument.
                                                                *cpo-H*
                H       When using "I" on a line with only blanks, insert
                        before the last blank.  Without this flag insert after
                        the last blank.
                                                                *cpo-i*
                i       When included, interrupting the reading of a file will
                        leave it modified.
                                                                *cpo-I*
                I       When moving the cursor up or down just after inserting
                        indent for 'autoindent', do not delete the indent.
                                                                *cpo-j*
                j       When joining lines, only add two spaces after a '.',
                        not after '!' or '?'.  Also see 'joinspaces'.
                                                                *cpo-J*
                J       A |sentence| has to be followed by two spaces after
                        the '.', '!' or '?'.  A <Tab> is not recognized as
                        white space.
                                                                *cpo-k*
                k       Disable the recognition of raw key codes in
                        mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of menu
                        commands.  For example, if <Key> sends ^[OA (where ^[
                        is <Esc>), the command ":map X ^[OA" results in X
                        being mapped to:
                                'k' included:   "^[OA"   (3 characters)
                                'k' excluded:   "<Key>"  (one key code)
                        Also see the '<' flag below.
                                                                *cpo-K*
                K       Don't wait for a key code to complete when it is
                        halfway a mapping.  This breaks mapping <F1><F1> when
                        only part of the second <F1> has been read.  It
                        enables cancelling the mapping by typing <F1><Esc>.
                                                                *cpo-l*
                l       Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
                        literally, only "\]", "\^", "\-" and "\\" are special.
                        See |/[]|
                           'l' included: "/[ \t]"  finds <Space>, '\' and 't'
                           'l' excluded: "/[ \t]"  finds <Space> and <Tab>
                        Also see |cpo-\|.
                                                                *cpo-L*
                L       When the 'list' option is set, 'wrapmargin',
                        'textwidth', 'softtabstop' and Virtual Replace mode
                        (see |gR|) count a <Tab> as two characters, instead of
                        the normal behavior of a <Tab>.
                                                                *cpo-m*
                m       When included, a showmatch will always wait half a
                        second.  When not included, a showmatch will wait half
                        a second or until a character is typed.  |'showmatch'|
                                                                *cpo-M*
                M       When excluded, "%" matching will take backslashes into
                        account.  Thus in "( \( )" and "\( ( \)" the outer
                        parenthesis match.  When included "%" ignores
                        backslashes, which is Vi compatible.
                                                                *cpo-n*
                n       When included, the column used for 'number' and
                        'relativenumber' will also be used for text of wrapped
                        lines.
                                                                *cpo-o*
                o       Line offset to search command is not remembered for
                        next search.
                                                                *cpo-O*
                O       Don't complain if a file is being overwritten, even
                        when it didn't exist when editing it.  This is a
                        protection against a file unexpectedly created by
                        someone else.  Vi didn't complain about this.
                                                                *cpo-p*
                p       Vi compatible Lisp indenting.  When not present, a
                        slightly better algorithm is used.
                                                                *cpo-P*
                P       When included, a ":write" command that appends to a
                        file will set the file name for the current buffer, if
                        the current buffer doesn't have a file name yet and
                        the 'F' flag is also included |cpo-F|.
                                                                *cpo-q*
                q       When joining multiple lines leave the cursor at the
                        position where it would be when joining two lines.
                                                                *cpo-r*
                r       Redo ("." command) uses "/" to repeat a search
                        command, instead of the actually used search string.
                                                                *cpo-R*
                R       Remove marks from filtered lines.  Without this flag
                        marks are kept like |:keepmarks| was used.
                                                                *cpo-s*
                s       Set buffer options when entering the buffer for the
                        first time.  This is like it is in Vim version 3.0.
                        And it is the default.  If not present the options are
                        set when the buffer is created.
                                                                *cpo-S*
                S       Set buffer options always when entering a buffer
                        (except 'readonly', 'fileformat', 'filetype' and
                        'syntax').  This is the (most) Vi compatible setting.
                        The options are set to the values in the current
                        buffer.  When you change an option and go to another
                        buffer, the value is copied.  Effectively makes the
                        buffer options global to all buffers.

                        's'    'S'     copy buffer options
                        no     no      when buffer created
                        yes    no      when buffer first entered (default)
                         X     yes     each time when buffer entered (vi comp.)
                                                                *cpo-t*
                t       Search pattern for the tag command is remembered for
                        "n" command.  Otherwise Vim only puts the pattern in
                        the history for search pattern, but doesn't change the
                        last used search pattern.
                                                                *cpo-u*
                u       Undo is Vi compatible.  See |undo-two-ways|.
                                                                *cpo-v*
                v       Backspaced characters remain visible on the screen in
                        Insert mode.  Without this flag the characters are
                        erased from the screen right away.  With this flag the
                        screen newly typed text overwrites backspaced
                        characters.
                                                                *cpo-w*
                w       When using "cw" on a blank character, only change one
                        character and not all blanks until the start of the
                        next word.
                                                                *cpo-W*
                W       Don't overwrite a readonly file.  When omitted, ":w!"
                        overwrites a readonly file, if possible.
                                                                *cpo-x*
                x       <Esc> on the command-line executes the command-line.
                        The default in Vim is to abandon the command-line,
                        because <Esc> normally aborts a command.  |c_<Esc>|
                                                                *cpo-X*
                X       When using a count with "R" the replaced text is
                        deleted only once.  Also when repeating "R" with "."
                        and a count.
                                                                *cpo-y*
                y       A yank command can be redone with ".".
                                                                *cpo-Z*
                Z       When using "w!" while the 'readonly' option is set,
                        don't reset 'readonly'.
                                                                *cpo-!*
                !       When redoing a filter command, use the last used
                        external command, whatever it was.  Otherwise the last
                        used -filter- command is used.
                                                                *cpo-$*
                $       When making a change to one line, don't redisplay the
                        line, but put a '$' at the end of the changed text.
                        The changed text will be overwritten when you type the
                        new text.  The line is redisplayed if you type any
                        command that moves the cursor from the insertion
                        point.
                                                                *cpo-%*
                %       Vi-compatible matching is done for the "%" command.
                        Does not recognize "#if", "#endif", etc.
                        Does not recognize "/*" and "*/".
                        Parens inside single and double quotes are also
                        counted, causing a string that contains a paren to
                        disturb the matching.  For example, in a line like
                        "if (strcmp("foo(", s))" the first paren does not
                        match the last one.  When this flag is not included,
                        parens inside single and double quotes are treated
                        specially.  When matching a paren outside of quotes,
                        everything inside quotes is ignored.  When matching a
                        paren inside quotes, it will find the matching one (if
                        there is one).  This works very well for C programs.
                        This flag is also used for other features, such as
                        C-indenting.
                                                                *cpo--*
                -       When included, a vertical movement command fails when
                        it would go above the first line or below the last
                        line.  Without it the cursor moves to the first or
                        last line, unless it already was in that line.
                        Applies to the commands "-", "k", CTRL-P, "+", "j",
                        CTRL-N, CTRL-J and ":1234".
                                                                *cpo-+*
                +       When included, a ":write file" command will reset the
                        'modified' flag of the buffer, even though the buffer
                        itself may still be different from its file.
                                                                *cpo-star*
                *       Use ":*" in the same way as ":@".  When not included,
                        ":*" is an alias for ":'<,'>", select the Visual area.
                                                                *cpo-<*
                <       Disable the recognition of special key codes in |<>|
                        form in mappings, abbreviations, and the "to" part of
                        menu commands.  For example, the command
                        ":map X <Tab>" results in X being mapped to:
                                '<' included:   "<Tab>"  (5 characters)
                                '<' excluded:   "^I"     (^I is a real <Tab>)
                        Also see the 'k' flag above.
                                                                *cpo->*
                >       When appending to a register, put a line break before
                        the appended text.
                                                                *cpo-;*
                ;       When using |,| or |;| to repeat the last |t| search
                        and the cursor is right in front of the searched
                        character, the cursor won't move. When not included,
                        the cursor would skip over it and jump to the
                        following occurence.

        POSIX flags.  These are not included in the Vi default value, except
        when $VIM_POSIX was set on startup. |posix|

            contains    behavior        ~
                                                                *cpo-#*
                #       A count before "D", "o" and "O" has no effect.
                                                                *cpo-&*
                &       When ":preserve" was used keep the swap file when
                        exiting normally while this buffer is still loaded.
                        This flag is tested when exiting.
                                                                *cpo-\*
                \       Backslash in a [] range in a search pattern is taken
                        literally, only "\]" is special  See |/[]|
                           '\' included: "/[ \-]"  finds <Space>, '\' and '-'
                           '\' excluded: "/[ \-]"  finds <Space> and '-'
                        Also see |cpo-l|.
                                                                *cpo-/*
                /       When "%" is used as the replacement string in a |:s|
                        command, use the previous replacement string. |:s%|
                                                                *cpo-{*
                {       The |{| and |}| commands also stop at a "{" character
                        at the start of a line.
                                                                *cpo-.*
                .       The ":chdir" and ":cd" commands fail if the current
                        buffer is modified, unless ! is used.  Vim doesn't
                        need this, since it remembers the full path of an
                        opened file.
                                                                *cpo-bar*
                |       The value of the $LINES and $COLUMNS environment
                        variables overrule the terminal size values obtained
                        with system specific functions.


                                                *'cryptmethod'* *'cm'*
'cryptmethod'           string  (default "zip")
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
        Method used for encryption when the buffer is written to a file:
                                                        *pkzip*
           zip          PkZip compatible method.  A weak kind of encryption.
                        Backwards compatible with Vim 7.2 and older.
                                                        *blowfish*
           blowfish     Blowfish method.  Strong encryption.  Requires Vim 7.3
                        or later, files can NOT be read by Vim 7.2 and older.
                        This adds a "seed" to the file, every time you write
                        the file the encrypted bytes will be different.

        When reading an encrypted file 'cryptmethod' will be set automatically
        to the detected method of the file being read.  Thus if you write it
        without changing 'cryptmethod' the same method will be used.
        Changing 'cryptmethod' does not mark the file as modified, you have to
        explicitly write it, you don't get a warning unless there are other
        modifications.  Also see |:X|.

        When setting the global value to an empty string, it will end up with
        the value "zip".  When setting the local value to an empty string the
        buffer will use the global value.

        When a new encryption method is added in a later version of Vim, and
        the current version does not recognize it, you will get *E821* .
        You need to edit this file with the later version of Vim.


                                                *'cscopepathcomp'* *'cspc'*
'cscopepathcomp' 'cspc' number  (default 0)
                        global
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
                        feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        Determines how many components of the path to show in a list of tags.
        See |cscopepathcomp|.

                                                *'cscopeprg'* *'csprg'*
'cscopeprg' 'csprg'     string  (default "cscope")
                        global
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
                        feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        Specifies the command to execute cscope.  See |cscopeprg|.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'cscopequickfix'* *'csqf'*
'cscopequickfix' 'csqf' string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
                        or |+quickfix| features}
                        {not in Vi}
        Specifies whether to use quickfix window to show cscope results.
        See |cscopequickfix|.

                                                *'cscoperelative'* *'csre'*
'cscoperelative' 'csre' boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
                        feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        In the absence of a prefix (-P) for cscope. setting this option enables
        to use the basename of cscope.out path as the prefix.
        See |cscoperelative|.

                                *'cscopetag'* *'cst'* *'nocscopetag'* *'nocst'*
'cscopetag' 'cst'       boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
                        feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        Use cscope for tag commands.  See |cscope-options|.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'cscopetagorder'* *'csto'*
'cscopetagorder' 'csto' number  (default 0)
                        global
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
                        feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        Determines the order in which ":cstag" performs a search.  See
        |cscopetagorder|.
        NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.

                                        *'cscopeverbose'* *'csverb'*
                                        *'nocscopeverbose'* *'nocsverb'*
'cscopeverbose' 'csverb' boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cscope|
                        feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        Give messages when adding a cscope database.  See |cscopeverbose|.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                        *'cursorbind'* *'crb'* *'nocursorbind'* *'nocrb'*
'cursorbind' 'crb'      boolean  (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cursorbind|
                        feature}
        When this option is set, as the cursor in the current
        window moves other cursorbound windows (windows that also have
        this option set) move their cursors to the corresponding line and
        column.  This option is useful for viewing the
        differences between two versions of a file (see 'diff'); in diff mode,
        inserted and deleted lines (though not characters within a line) are
        taken into account.


                        *'cursorcolumn'* *'cuc'* *'nocursorcolumn'* *'nocuc'*
'cursorcolumn' 'cuc'    boolean (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
                        feature}
        Highlight the screen column of the cursor with CursorColumn
        |hl-CursorColumn|.  Useful to align text.  Will make screen redrawing
        slower.
        If you only want the highlighting in the current window you can use
        these autocommands: >
                au WinLeave * set nocursorline nocursorcolumn
                au WinEnter * set cursorline cursorcolumn
<

                        *'cursorline'* *'cul'* *'nocursorline'* *'nocul'*
'cursorline' 'cul'      boolean (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
                        feature}
        Highlight the screen line of the cursor with CursorLine
        |hl-CursorLine|.  Useful to easily spot the cursor.  Will make screen
        redrawing slower.
        When Visual mode is active the highlighting isn't used to make it
        easier to see the selected text.


                                                *'debug'*
'debug'                 string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        These values can be used:
        msg     Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given
                anyway.
        throw   Error messages that would otherwise be omitted will be given
                anyway and also throw an exception and set |v:errmsg|.
        beep    A message will be given when otherwise only a beep would be
                produced.
        The values can be combined, separated by a comma.
        "msg" and "throw" are useful for debugging 'foldexpr', 'formatexpr' or
        'indentexpr'.

                                                *'define'* *'def'*
'define' 'def'          string  (default "^\s*#\s*define")
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
        Pattern to be used to find a macro definition.  It is a search
        pattern, just like for the "/" command.  This option is used for the
        commands like "[i" and "[d" |include-search|.  The 'isident' option is
        used to recognize the defined name after the match:
                {match with 'define'}{non-ID chars}{defined name}{non-ID char}
        See |option-backslash| about inserting backslashes to include a space
        or backslash.
        The default value is for C programs.  For C++ this value would be
        useful, to include const type declarations: >
                ^\(#\s*define\|[a-z]*\s*const\s*[a-z]*\)
<       When using the ":set" command, you need to double the backslashes!

                        *'delcombine'* *'deco'* *'nodelcombine'* *'nodeco'*
'delcombine' 'deco'     boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
                        feature}
        If editing Unicode and this option is set, backspace and Normal mode
        "x" delete each combining character on its own.  When it is off (the
        default) the character along with its combining characters are
        deleted.
        Note: When 'delcombine' is set "xx" may work different from "2x"!

        This is useful for Arabic, Hebrew and many other languages where one
        may have combining characters overtop of base characters, and want
        to remove only the combining ones.

                                                *'dictionary'* *'dict'*
'dictionary' 'dict'     string  (default "")
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
        List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
        for keyword completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-K|.  Each file should
        contain a list of words.  This can be one word per line, or several
        words per line, separated by non-keyword characters (white space is
        preferred).  Maximum line length is 510 bytes.
        When this option is empty, or an entry "spell" is present, spell
        checking is enabled the currently active spelling is used. |spell|
        To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
        after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
        name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
        This has nothing to do with the |Dictionary| variable type.
        Where to find a list of words?
        - On FreeBSD, there is the file "/usr/share/dict/words".
        - In the Simtel archive, look in the "msdos/linguist" directory.
        - In "miscfiles" of the GNU collection.
        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.
        Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.

                                                        *'diff'* *'nodiff'*
'diff'                  boolean (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
                        feature}
        Join the current window in the group of windows that shows differences
        between files.  See |vimdiff|.

                                                *'dex'* *'diffexpr'*
'diffexpr' 'dex'        string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
                        feature}
        Expression which is evaluated to obtain an ed-style diff file from two
        versions of a file.  See |diff-diffexpr|.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'dip'* *'diffopt'*
'diffopt' 'dip'         string  (default "filler")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
                        feature}
        Option settings for diff mode.  It can consist of the following items.
        All are optional.  Items must be separated by a comma.

                filler          Show filler lines, to keep the text
                                synchronized with a window that has inserted
                                lines at the same position.  Mostly useful
                                when windows are side-by-side and 'scrollbind'
                                is set.

                context:{n}     Use a context of {n} lines between a change
                                and a fold that contains unchanged lines.
                                When omitted a context of six lines is used.
                                See |fold-diff|.

                icase           Ignore changes in case of text.  "a" and "A"
                                are considered the same.  Adds the "-i" flag
                                to the "diff" command if 'diffexpr' is empty.

                iwhite          Ignore changes in amount of white space.  Adds
                                the "-b" flag to the "diff" command if
                                'diffexpr' is empty.  Check the documentation
                                of the "diff" command for what this does
                                exactly.  It should ignore adding trailing
                                white space, but not leading white space.

                horizontal      Start diff mode with horizontal splits (unless
                                explicitly specified otherwise).

                vertical        Start diff mode with vertical splits (unless
                                explicitly specified otherwise).

                foldcolumn:{n}  Set the 'foldcolumn' option to {n} when
                                starting diff mode.  Without this 2 is used.

        Examples: >

                :set diffopt=filler,context:4
                :set diffopt=
                :set diffopt=filler,foldcolumn:3
<
                                     *'digraph'* *'dg'* *'nodigraph'* *'nodg'*
'digraph' 'dg'          boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+digraphs|
                        feature}
        Enable the entering of digraphs in Insert mode with {char1} <BS>
        {char2}.  See |digraphs|.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'directory'* *'dir'*
'directory' 'dir'       string  (default for Amiga: ".,t:",
                                 for MS-DOS and Win32: ".,c:\tmp,c:\temp"
                                 for Unix: ".,~/tmp,/var/tmp,/tmp")
                        global
        List of directory names for the swap file, separated with commas.
        - The swap file will be created in the first directory where this is
          possible.
        - Empty means that no swap file will be used (recovery is
          impossible!).
        - A directory "." means to put the swap file in the same directory as
          the edited file.  On Unix, a dot is prepended to the file name, so
          it doesn't show in a directory listing.  On MS-Windows the "hidden"
          attribute is set and a dot prepended if possible.
        - A directory starting with "./" (or ".\" for MS-DOS et al.) means to
          put the swap file relative to where the edited file is.  The leading
          "." is replaced with the path name of the edited file.
        - For Unix and Win32, if a directory ends in two path separators "//"
          or "\\", the swap file name will be built from the complete path to
          the file with all path separators substituted to percent '%' signs.
          This will ensure file name uniqueness in the preserve directory.
          On Win32, when a separating comma is following, you must use "//",
          since "\\" will include the comma in the file name.
        - Spaces after the comma are ignored, other spaces are considered part
          of the directory name.  To have a space at the start of a directory
          name, precede it with a backslash.
        - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with a backslash.
        - A directory name may end in an ':' or '/'.
        - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        - Careful with '\' characters, type one before a space, type two to
          get one in the option (see |option-backslash|), for example: >
            :set dir=c:\\tmp,\ dir\\,with\\,commas,\\\ dir\ with\ spaces
<       - For backwards compatibility with Vim version 3.0 a '>' at the start
          of the option is removed.
        Using "." first in the list is recommended.  This means that editing
        the same file twice will result in a warning.  Using "/tmp" on Unix is
        discouraged: When the system crashes you lose the swap file.
        "/var/tmp" is often not cleared when rebooting, thus is a better
        choice than "/tmp".  But it can contain a lot of files, your swap
        files get lost in the crowd.  That is why a "tmp" directory in your
        home directory is tried first.
        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.
        {Vi: directory to put temp file in, defaults to "/tmp"}

                                        *'display'* *'dy'*
'display' 'dy'          string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Change the way text is displayed.  This is comma separated list of
        flags:
        lastline        When included, as much as possible of the last line
                        in a window will be displayed.  When not included, a
                        last line that doesn't fit is replaced with "@" lines.
        uhex            Show unprintable characters hexadecimal as <xx>
                        instead of using ^C and ~C.

                                                *'eadirection'* *'ead'*
'eadirection' 'ead'     string  (default "both")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
                        feature}
        Tells when the 'equalalways' option applies:
                ver     vertically, width of windows is not affected
                hor     horizontally, height of windows is not affected
                both    width and height of windows is affected

                           *'ed'* *'edcompatible'* *'noed'* *'noedcompatible'*
'edcompatible' 'ed'     boolean (default off)
                        global
        Makes the 'g' and 'c' flags of the ":substitute" command to be
        toggled each time the flag is given.  See |complex-change|.  See
        also 'gdefault' option.
        Switching this option on is discouraged!

                                        *'encoding'* *'enc'* *E543*
'encoding' 'enc'        string (default: "latin1" or value from $LANG)
                        global
                        {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
                        feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        Sets the character encoding used inside Vim.  It applies to text in
        the buffers, registers, Strings in expressions, text stored in the
        viminfo file, etc.  It sets the kind of characters which Vim can work
        with.  See |encoding-names| for the possible values.

        NOTE: Changing this option will not change the encoding of the
        existing text in Vim.  It may cause non-ASCII text to become invalid.
        It should normally be kept at its default value, or set when Vim
        starts up.  See |multibyte|.  To reload the menus see |:menutrans|.

        This option cannot be set from a |modeline|.  It would most likely
        corrupt the text.

        NOTE: For GTK+ 2 it is highly recommended to set 'encoding' to
        "utf-8".  Although care has been taken to allow different values of
        'encoding', "utf-8" is the natural choice for the environment and
        avoids unnecessary conversion overhead.  "utf-8" has not been made
        the default to prevent different behavior of the GUI and terminal
        versions, and to avoid changing the encoding of newly created files
        without your knowledge (in case 'fileencodings' is empty).

        The character encoding of files can be different from 'encoding'.
        This is specified with 'fileencoding'.  The conversion is done with
        iconv() or as specified with 'charconvert'.

        If you need to know whether 'encoding' is a multi-byte encoding, you
        can use: >
                if has("multi_byte_encoding")
<
        Normally 'encoding' will be equal to your current locale.  This will
        be the default if Vim recognizes your environment settings.  If
        'encoding' is not set to the current locale, 'termencoding' must be
        set to convert typed and displayed text.  See |encoding-table|.

        When you set this option, it fires the |EncodingChanged| autocommand
        event so that you can set up fonts if necessary.

        When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase.  Thus
        you can set it with uppercase values too.  Underscores are translated
        to '-' signs.
        When the encoding is recognized, it is changed to the standard name.
        For example "Latin-1" becomes "latin1", "ISO_88592" becomes
        "iso-8859-2" and "utf8" becomes "utf-8".

        Note: "latin1" is also used when the encoding could not be detected.
        This only works when editing files in the same encoding!  When the
        actual character set is not latin1, make sure 'fileencoding' and
        'fileencodings' are empty.  When conversion is needed, switch to using
        utf-8.

        When "unicode", "ucs-2" or "ucs-4" is used, Vim internally uses utf-8.
        You don't notice this while editing, but it does matter for the
        |viminfo-file|.  And Vim expects the terminal to use utf-8 too.  Thus
        setting 'encoding' to one of these values instead of utf-8 only has
        effect for encoding used for files when 'fileencoding' is empty.

        When 'encoding' is set to a Unicode encoding, and 'fileencodings' was
        not set yet, the default for 'fileencodings' is changed.

                        *'endofline'* *'eol'* *'noendofline'* *'noeol'*
'endofline' 'eol'       boolean (default on)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        When writing a file and this option is off and the 'binary' option
        is on, no <EOL> will be written for the last line in the file.  This
        option is automatically set when starting to edit a new file, unless
        the file does not have an <EOL> for the last line in the file, in
        which case it is reset.  Normally you don't have to set or reset this
        option.  When 'binary' is off the value is not used when writing the
        file.  When 'binary' is on it is used to remember the presence of a
        <EOL> for the last line in the file, so that when you write the file
        the situation from the original file can be kept.  But you can change
        it if you want to.

                             *'equalalways'* *'ea'* *'noequalalways'* *'noea'*
'equalalways' 'ea'      boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When on, all the windows are automatically made the same size after
        splitting or closing a window.  This also happens the moment the
        option is switched on.  When off, splitting a window will reduce the
        size of the current window and leave the other windows the same.  When
        closing a window the extra lines are given to the window next to it
        (depending on 'splitbelow' and 'splitright').
        When mixing vertically and horizontally split windows, a minimal size
        is computed and some windows may be larger if there is room.  The
        'eadirection' option tells in which direction the size is affected.
        Changing the height and width of a window can be avoided by setting
        'winfixheight' and 'winfixwidth', respectively.
        If a window size is specified when creating a new window sizes are
        currently not equalized (it's complicated, but may be implemented in
        the future).

                                                *'equalprg'* *'ep'*
'equalprg' 'ep'         string  (default "")
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
        External program to use for "=" command.  When this option is empty
        the internal formatting functions are used; either 'lisp', 'cindent'
        or 'indentexpr'.  When Vim was compiled without internal formatting,
        the "indent" program is used.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
        about including spaces and backslashes.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                        *'errorbells'* *'eb'* *'noerrorbells'* *'noeb'*
'errorbells' 'eb'       boolean (default off)
                        global
        Ring the bell (beep or screen flash) for error messages.  This only
        makes a difference for error messages, the bell will be used always
        for a lot of errors without a message (e.g., hitting <Esc> in Normal
        mode).  See 'visualbell' on how to make the bell behave like a beep,
        screen flash or do nothing.

                                                *'errorfile'* *'ef'*
'errorfile' 'ef'        string  (Amiga default: "AztecC.Err",
                                        others: "errors.err")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
                        feature}
        Name of the errorfile for the QuickFix mode (see |:cf|).
        When the "-q" command-line argument is used, 'errorfile' is set to the
        following argument.  See |-q|.
        NOT used for the ":make" command.  See 'makeef' for that.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'errorformat'* *'efm'*
'errorformat' 'efm'     string  (default is very long)
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
                        feature}
        Scanf-like description of the format for the lines in the error file
        (see |errorformat|).

                                     *'esckeys'* *'ek'* *'noesckeys'* *'noek'*
'esckeys' 'ek'          boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Function keys that start with an <Esc> are recognized in Insert
        mode.  When this option is off, the cursor and function keys cannot be
        used in Insert mode if they start with an <Esc>.  The advantage of
        this is that the single <Esc> is recognized immediately, instead of
        after one second.  Instead of resetting this option, you might want to
        try changing the values for 'timeoutlen' and 'ttimeoutlen'.  Note that
        when 'esckeys' is off, you can still map anything, but the cursor keys
        won't work by default.
        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                                *'eventignore'* *'ei'*
'eventignore' 'ei'      string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
                        feature}
        A list of autocommand event names, which are to be ignored.
        When set to "all" or when "all" is one of the items, all autocommand
        events are ignored, autocommands will not be executed.
        Otherwise this is a comma separated list of event names.  Example: >
            :set ei=WinEnter,WinLeave
<
                                 *'expandtab'* *'et'* *'noexpandtab'* *'noet'*
'expandtab' 'et'        boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        In Insert mode: Use the appropriate number of spaces to insert a
        <Tab>.  Spaces are used in indents with the '>' and '<' commands and
        when 'autoindent' is on.  To insert a real tab when 'expandtab' is
        on, use CTRL-V<Tab>.  See also |:retab| and |ins-expandtab|.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                        *'exrc'* *'ex'* *'noexrc'* *'noex'*
'exrc' 'ex'             boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Enables the reading of .vimrc, .exrc and .gvimrc in the current
        directory.  If you switch this option on you should also consider
        setting the 'secure' option (see |initialization|).  Using a local
        .exrc, .vimrc or .gvimrc is a potential security leak, use with care!
        also see |.vimrc| and |gui-init|.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                *'fileencoding'* *'fenc'* *E213*
'fileencoding' 'fenc'   string (default: "")
                        local to buffer
                        {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
                        feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        Sets the character encoding for the file of this buffer.

        When 'fileencoding' is different from 'encoding', conversion will be
        done when writing the file.  For reading see below.
        When 'fileencoding' is empty, the same value as 'encoding' will be
        used (no conversion when reading or writing a file).
        Conversion will also be done when 'encoding' and 'fileencoding' are
        both a Unicode encoding and 'fileencoding' is not utf-8.  That's
        because internally Unicode is always stored as utf-8.
                WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information!  When
                'encoding' is "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding, conversion
                is most likely done in a way that the reverse conversion
                results in the same text.  When 'encoding' is not "utf-8" some
                characters may be lost!

        See 'encoding' for the possible values.  Additionally, values may be
        specified that can be handled by the converter, see
        |mbyte-conversion|.

        When reading a file 'fileencoding' will be set from 'fileencodings'.
        To read a file in a certain encoding it won't work by setting
        'fileencoding', use the |++enc| argument.  One exception: when
        'fileencodings' is empty the value of 'fileencoding' is used.
        For a new file the global value of 'fileencoding' is used.

        Prepending "8bit-" and "2byte-" has no meaning here, they are ignored.
        When the option is set, the value is converted to lowercase.  Thus
        you can set it with uppercase values too.  '_' characters are
        replaced with '-'.  If a name is recognized from the list for
        'encoding', it is replaced by the standard name.  For example
        "ISO8859-2" becomes "iso-8859-2".

        When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
        option is set, because the file would be different when written.

        Keep in mind that changing 'fenc' from a modeline happens
        AFTER the text has been read, thus it applies to when the file will be
        written.  If you do set 'fenc' in a modeline, you might want to set
        'nomodified' to avoid not being able to ":q".

        This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.

                                                        *'fe'*
        NOTE: Before version 6.0 this option specified the encoding for the
        whole of Vim, this was a mistake.  Now use 'encoding' instead.  The
        old short name was 'fe', which is no longer used.

                                        *'fileencodings'* *'fencs'*
'fileencodings' 'fencs' string (default: "ucs-bom",
                                    "ucs-bom,utf-8,default,latin1" when
                                    'encoding' is set to a Unicode value)
                        global
                        {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
                        feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        This is a list of character encodings considered when starting to edit
        an existing file.  When a file is read, Vim tries to use the first
        mentioned character encoding.  If an error is detected, the next one
        in the list is tried.  When an encoding is found that works,
        'fileencoding' is set to it.  If all fail, 'fileencoding' is set to
        an empty string, which means the value of 'encoding' is used.
                WARNING: Conversion can cause loss of information!  When
                'encoding' is "utf-8" (or one of the other Unicode variants)
                conversion is most likely done in a way that the reverse
                conversion results in the same text.  When 'encoding' is not
                "utf-8" some non-ASCII characters may be lost!  You can use
                the |++bad| argument to specify what is done with characters
                that can't be converted.
        For an empty file or a file with only ASCII characters most encodings
        will work and the first entry of 'fileencodings' will be used (except
        "ucs-bom", which requires the BOM to be present).  If you prefer
        another encoding use an BufReadPost autocommand event to test if your
        preferred encoding is to be used.  Example: >
                au BufReadPost * if search('\S', 'w') == 0 |
                        \ set fenc=iso-2022-jp | endif
<       This sets 'fileencoding' to "iso-2022-jp" if the file does not contain
        non-blank characters.
        When the |++enc| argument is used then the value of 'fileencodings' is
        not used.
        Note that 'fileencodings' is not used for a new file, the global value
        of 'fileencoding' is used instead.  You can set it with: >
                :setglobal fenc=iso-8859-2
<       This means that a non-existing file may get a different encoding than
        an empty file.
        The special value "ucs-bom" can be used to check for a Unicode BOM
        (Byte Order Mark) at the start of the file.  It must not be preceded
        by "utf-8" or another Unicode encoding for this to work properly.
        An entry for an 8-bit encoding (e.g., "latin1") should be the last,
        because Vim cannot detect an error, thus the encoding is always
        accepted.
        The special value "default" can be used for the encoding from the
        environment.  This is the default value for 'encoding'.  It is useful
        when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and your environment uses a
        non-latin1 encoding, such as Russian.
        When 'encoding' is "utf-8" and a file contains an illegal byte
        sequence it won't be recognized as UTF-8.  You can use the |8g8|
        command to find the illegal byte sequence.
        WRONG VALUES:                   WHAT'S WRONG:
                latin1,utf-8            "latin1" will always be used
                utf-8,ucs-bom,latin1    BOM won't be recognized in an utf-8
                                        file
                cp1250,latin1           "cp1250" will always be used
        If 'fileencodings' is empty, 'fileencoding' is not modified.
        See 'fileencoding' for the possible values.
        Setting this option does not have an effect until the next time a file
        is read.

                                        *'fileformat'* *'ff'*
'fileformat' 'ff'       string (MS-DOS, MS-Windows, OS/2 default: "dos",
                                Unix default: "unix",
                                Macintosh default: "mac")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        This gives the <EOL> of the current buffer, which is used for
        reading/writing the buffer from/to a file:
            dos     <CR> <NL>
            unix    <NL>
            mac     <CR>
        When "dos" is used, CTRL-Z at the end of a file is ignored.
        See |file-formats| and |file-read|.
        For the character encoding of the file see 'fileencoding'.
        When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformat' is ignored, file I/O
        works like it was set to "unix'.
        This option is set automatically when starting to edit a file and
        'fileformats' is not empty and 'binary' is off.
        When this option is set, after starting to edit a file, the 'modified'
        option is set, because the file would be different when written.
        This option can not be changed when 'modifiable' is off.
        For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to "dos",
        'textmode' is set, otherwise 'textmode' is reset.

                                        *'fileformats'* *'ffs'*
'fileformats' 'ffs'     string (default:
                                Vim+Vi  MS-DOS, MS-Windows OS/2: "dos,unix",
                                Vim     Unix: "unix,dos",
                                Vim     Mac: "mac,unix,dos",
                                Vi      Cygwin: "unix,dos",
                                Vi      others: "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        This gives the end-of-line (<EOL>) formats that will be tried when
        starting to edit a new buffer and when reading a file into an existing
        buffer:
        - When empty, the format defined with 'fileformat' will be used
          always.  It is not set automatically.
        - When set to one name, that format will be used whenever a new buffer
          is opened.  'fileformat' is set accordingly for that buffer.  The
          'fileformats' name will be used when a file is read into an existing
          buffer, no matter what 'fileformat' for that buffer is set to.
        - When more than one name is present, separated by commas, automatic
          <EOL> detection will be done when reading a file.  When starting to
          edit a file, a check is done for the <EOL>:
          1. If all lines end in <CR><NL>, and 'fileformats' includes "dos",
             'fileformat' is set to "dos".
          2. If a <NL> is found and 'fileformats' includes "unix", 'fileformat'
             is set to "unix".  Note that when a <NL> is found without a
             preceding <CR>, "unix" is preferred over "dos".
          3. If 'fileformat' has not yet been set, and if 'fileformats'
             includes "mac", 'fileformat' is set to "mac".
             This means that "mac" is only chosen when:
              "unix" is not present or no <NL> is found in the file, and
              "dos" is not present or no <CR><NL> is found in the file.
             Except: if "unix" was chosen, but there is a <CR> before
             the first <NL>, and there appear to be more <CR>s than <NL>s in
             the first few lines, "mac" is used.
          4. If 'fileformat' is still not set, the first name from
             'fileformats' is used.
          When reading a file into an existing buffer, the same is done, but
          this happens like 'fileformat' has been set appropriately for that
          file only, the option is not changed.
        When 'binary' is set, the value of 'fileformats' is not used.

        Note that when Vim starts up with an empty buffer this option is not
        used.  Set 'fileformat' in your .vimrc instead.

        For systems with a Dos-like <EOL> (<CR><NL>), when reading files that
        are ":source"ed and for vimrc files, automatic <EOL> detection may be
        done:
        - When 'fileformats' is empty, there is no automatic detection.  Dos
          format will be used.
        - When 'fileformats' is set to one or more names, automatic detection
          is done.  This is based on the first <NL> in the file: If there is a
          <CR> in front of it, Dos format is used, otherwise Unix format is
          used.
        Also see |file-formats|.
        For backwards compatibility: When this option is set to an empty
        string or one format (no comma is included), 'textauto' is reset,
        otherwise 'textauto' is set.
        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                        *'filetype'* *'ft'*
'filetype' 'ft'         string (default: "")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+autocmd|
                        feature}
        When this option is set, the FileType autocommand event is triggered.
        All autocommands that match with the value of this option will be
        executed.  Thus the value of 'filetype' is used in place of the file
        name.
        Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current file type.
        This option is normally set when the file type is detected.  To enable
        this use the ":filetype on" command. |:filetype|
        Setting this option to a different value is most useful in a modeline,
        for a file for which the file type is not automatically recognized.
        Example, for in an IDL file:
                /* vim: set filetype=idl : */ ~
        |FileType| |filetypes|
        When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype
        names.  Example:
                /* vim: set filetype=c.doxygen : */ ~
        This will use the "c" filetype first, then the "doxygen" filetype.
        This works both for filetype plugins and for syntax files.  More than
        one dot may appear.
        This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
        'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
        Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

                                                *'fillchars'* *'fcs'*
'fillchars' 'fcs'       string  (default "vert:|,fold:-")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
                        and |+folding| features}
        Characters to fill the statuslines and vertical separators.
        It is a comma separated list of items:

          item          default         Used for ~
          stl:c         ' ' or '^'      statusline of the current window
          stlnc:c       ' ' or '-'      statusline of the non-current windows
          vert:c        '|'             vertical separators |:vsplit|
          fold:c        '-'             filling 'foldtext'
          diff:c        '-'             deleted lines of the 'diff' option

        Any one that is omitted will fall back to the default.  For "stl" and
        "stlnc" the space will be used when there is highlighting, '^' or '-'
        otherwise.

        Example: >
            :set fillchars=stl:^,stlnc:-,vert:\|,fold:-,diff:-
<       This is similar to the default, except that these characters will also
        be used when there is highlighting.

        for "stl" and "stlnc" only single-byte values are supported.

        The highlighting used for these items:
          item          highlight group ~
          stl:c         StatusLine              |hl-StatusLine|
          stlnc:c       StatusLineNC            |hl-StatusLineNC|
          vert:c        VertSplit               |hl-VertSplit|
          fold:c        Folded                  |hl-Folded|
          diff:c        DiffDelete              |hl-DiffDelete|

                                        *'fkmap'* *'fk'* *'nofkmap'* *'nofk'*
'fkmap' 'fk'            boolean (default off)                   *E198*
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
                        feature}
        When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Farsi character set.
        Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
        toggle this option |i_CTRL-_|.  See |farsi.txt|.

                                                *'foldclose'* *'fcl'*
'foldclose' 'fcl'       string (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        When set to "all", a fold is closed when the cursor isn't in it and
        its level is higher than 'foldlevel'.  Useful if you want folds to
        automatically close when moving out of them.

                                                *'foldcolumn'* *'fdc'*
'foldcolumn' 'fdc'      number (default 0)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        When non-zero, a column with the specified width is shown at the side
        of the window which indicates open and closed folds.  The maximum
        value is 12.
        See |folding|.

                        *'foldenable'* *'fen'* *'nofoldenable'* *'nofen'*
'foldenable' 'fen'      boolean (default on)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        When off, all folds are open.  This option can be used to quickly
        switch between showing all text unfolded and viewing the text with
        folds (including manually opened or closed folds).  It can be toggled
        with the |zi| command.  The 'foldcolumn' will remain blank when
        'foldenable' is off.
        This option is set by commands that create a new fold or close a fold.
        See |folding|.

                                                *'foldexpr'* *'fde'*
'foldexpr' 'fde'        string (default: "0")
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        or |+eval| features}
        The expression used for when 'foldmethod' is "expr".  It is evaluated
        for each line to obtain its fold level.  See |fold-expr|.

        The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
        |sandbox-option|.
        This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
        on.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        evaluating 'foldexpr' |textlock|.

                                                *'foldignore'* *'fdi'*
'foldignore' 'fdi'      string (default: "#")
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        Used only when 'foldmethod' is "indent".  Lines starting with
        characters in 'foldignore' will get their fold level from surrounding
        lines.  White space is skipped before checking for this character.
        The default "#" works well for C programs.  See |fold-indent|.

                                                *'foldlevel'* *'fdl'*
'foldlevel' 'fdl'       number (default: 0)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        Sets the fold level: Folds with a higher level will be closed.
        Setting this option to zero will close all folds.  Higher numbers will
        close fewer folds.
        This option is set by commands like |zm|, |zM| and |zR|.
        See |fold-foldlevel|.

                                                *'foldlevelstart'* *'fdls'*
'foldlevelstart' 'fdls' number (default: -1)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        Sets 'foldlevel' when starting to edit another buffer in a window.
        Useful to always start editing with all folds closed (value zero),
        some folds closed (one) or no folds closed (99).
        This is done before reading any modeline, thus a setting in a modeline
        overrules this option.  Starting to edit a file for |diff-mode| also
        ignores this option and closes all folds.
        It is also done before BufReadPre autocommands, to allow an autocmd to
        overrule the 'foldlevel' value for specific files.
        When the value is negative, it is not used.

                                                *'foldmarker'* *'fmr'* *E536*
'foldmarker' 'fmr'      string (default: "{{{,}}}")
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        The start and end marker used when 'foldmethod' is "marker".  There
        must be one comma, which separates the start and end marker.  The
        marker is a literal string (a regular expression would be too slow).
        See |fold-marker|.

                                                *'foldmethod'* *'fdm'*
'foldmethod' 'fdm'      string (default: "manual")
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        The kind of folding used for the current window.  Possible values:
        |fold-manual|   manual      Folds are created manually.
        |fold-indent|   indent      Lines with equal indent form a fold.
        |fold-expr|     expr        'foldexpr' gives the fold level of a line.
        |fold-marker|   marker      Markers are used to specify folds.
        |fold-syntax|   syntax      Syntax highlighting items specify folds.
        |fold-diff|     diff        Fold text that is not changed.

                                                *'foldminlines'* *'fml'*
'foldminlines' 'fml'    number (default: 1)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        Sets the number of screen lines above which a fold can be displayed
        closed.  Also for manually closed folds.  With the default value of
        one a fold can only be closed if it takes up two or more screen lines.
        Set to zero to be able to close folds of just one screen line.
        Note that this only has an effect on what is displayed.  After using
        "zc" to close a fold, which is displayed open because it's smaller
        than 'foldminlines', a following "zc" may close a containing fold.

                                                *'foldnestmax'* *'fdn'*
'foldnestmax' 'fdn'     number (default: 20)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        Sets the maximum nesting of folds for the "indent" and "syntax"
        methods.  This avoids that too many folds will be created.  Using more
        than 20 doesn't work, because the internal limit is 20.

                                                *'foldopen'* *'fdo'*
'foldopen' 'fdo'        string (default: "block,hor,mark,percent,quickfix,
                                                             search,tag,undo")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        Specifies for which type of commands folds will be opened, if the
        command moves the cursor into a closed fold.  It is a comma separated
        list of items.
        NOTE: When the command is part of a mapping this option is not used.
        Add the |zv| command to the mapping to get the same effect.
        (rationale: the mapping may want to control opening folds itself)

                item            commands ~
                all             any
                block           "(", "{", "[[", "[{", etc.
                hor             horizontal movements: "l", "w", "fx", etc.
                insert          any command in Insert mode
                jump            far jumps: "G", "gg", etc.
                mark            jumping to a mark: "'m", CTRL-O, etc.
                percent         "%"
                quickfix        ":cn", ":crew", ":make", etc.
                search          search for a pattern: "/", "n", "*", "gd", etc.
                                (not for a search pattern in a ":" command)
                                Also for |[s| and |]s|.
                tag             jumping to a tag: ":ta", CTRL-T, etc.
                undo            undo or redo: "u" and CTRL-R
        When a movement command is used for an operator (e.g., "dl" or "y%")
        this option is not used.  This means the operator will include the
        whole closed fold.
        Note that vertical movements are not here, because it would make it
        very difficult to move onto a closed fold.
        In insert mode the folds containing the cursor will always be open
        when text is inserted.
        To close folds you can re-apply 'foldlevel' with the |zx| command or
        set the 'foldclose' option to "all".

                                                *'foldtext'* *'fdt'*
'foldtext' 'fdt'        string (default: "foldtext()")
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+folding|
                        feature}
        An expression which is used to specify the text displayed for a closed
        fold.  See |fold-foldtext|.

        The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
        |sandbox-option|.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        evaluating 'foldtext' |textlock|.

                                        *'formatoptions'* *'fo'*
'formatoptions' 'fo'    string (Vim default: "tcq", Vi default: "vt")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        This is a sequence of letters which describes how automatic
        formatting is to be done.  See |fo-table|.  When the 'paste' option is
        on, no formatting is done (like 'formatoptions' is empty).  Commas can
        be inserted for readability.
        To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
        "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.
        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                        *'formatlistpat'* *'flp'*
'formatlistpat' 'flp'   string (default: "^\s*\d\+[\]:.)}\t ]\s*")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        A pattern that is used to recognize a list header.  This is used for
        the "n" flag in 'formatoptions'.
        The pattern must match exactly the text that will be the indent for
        the line below it.  You can use |/\ze| to mark the end of the match
        while still checking more characters.  There must be a character
        following the pattern, when it matches the whole line it is handled
        like there is no match.
        The default recognizes a number, followed by an optional punctuation
        character and white space.

                                                *'formatprg'* *'fp'*
'formatprg' 'fp'        string (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        The name of an external program that will be used to format the lines
        selected with the |gq| operator.  The program must take the input on
        stdin and produce the output on stdout.  The Unix program "fmt" is
        such a program.
        If the 'formatexpr' option is not empty it will be used instead.
        Otherwise, if 'formatprg' option is an empty string, the internal
        format function will be used |C-indenting|.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
        about including spaces and backslashes.
        The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
        |sandbox-option|.

                                                *'formatexpr'* *'fex'*
'formatexpr' 'fex'      string (default "")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+eval|
                        feature}
        Expression which is evaluated to format a range of lines for the |gq|
        operator or automatic formatting (see 'formatoptions').  When this
        option is empty 'formatprg' is used.

        The |v:lnum|  variable holds the first line to be formatted.
        The |v:count| variable holds the number of lines to be formatted.
        The |v:char|  variable holds the character that is going to be
                      inserted if the expression is being evaluated due to
                      automatic formatting.  This can be empty.  Don't insert
                      it yet!

        Example: >
                :set formatexpr=mylang#Format()
<       This will invoke the mylang#Format() function in the
        autoload/mylang.vim file in 'runtimepath'. |autoload|

        The expression is also evaluated when 'textwidth' is set and adding
        text beyond that limit.  This happens under the same conditions as
        when internal formatting is used.  Make sure the cursor is kept in the
        same spot relative to the text then!  The |mode()| function will
        return "i" or "R" in this situation.
        
        When the expression evaluates to non-zero Vim will fall back to using
        the internal format mechanism.

        The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
        |sandbox-option|.  That stops the option from working, since changing
        the buffer text is not allowed.

                                                *'fsync'* *'fs'*
'fsync' 'fs'            boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When on, the library function fsync() will be called after writing a
        file.  This will flush a file to disk, ensuring that it is safely
        written even on filesystems which do metadata-only journaling.  This
        will force the harddrive to spin up on Linux systems running in laptop
        mode, so it may be undesirable in some situations.  Be warned that
        turning this off increases the chances of data loss after a crash.  On
        systems without an fsync() implementation, this variable is always
        off.
        Also see 'swapsync' for controlling fsync() on swap files.

                                   *'gdefault'* *'gd'* *'nogdefault'* *'nogd'*
'gdefault' 'gd'         boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When on, the ":substitute" flag 'g' is default on.  This means that
        all matches in a line are substituted instead of one.  When a 'g' flag
        is given to a ":substitute" command, this will toggle the substitution
        of all or one match.  See |complex-change|.

                command         'gdefault' on   'gdefault' off  ~
                :s///             subst. all      subst. one
                :s///g            subst. one      subst. all
                :s///gg           subst. all      subst. one

        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'grepformat'* *'gfm'*
'grepformat' 'gfm'      string  (default "%f:%l%m,%f  %l%m")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Format to recognize for the ":grep" command output.
        This is a scanf-like string that uses the same format as the
        'errorformat' option: see |errorformat|.

                                                *'grepprg'* *'gp'*
'grepprg' 'gp'          string  (default "grep -n ",
                                        Unix: "grep -n $* /dev/null",
                                        Win32: "findstr /n" or "grep -n",
                                                      VMS: "SEARCH/NUMBERS ")
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
        Program to use for the |:grep| command.  This option may contain '%'
        and '#' characters, which are expanded like when used in a command-
        line.  The placeholder "$*" is allowed to specify where the arguments
        will be included.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See
        |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
        When your "grep" accepts the "-H" argument, use this to make ":grep"
        also work well with a single file: >
                :set grepprg=grep\ -nH
<       Special value: When 'grepprg' is set to "internal" the |:grep| command
        works like |:vimgrep|, |:lgrep| like |:lvimgrep|, |:grepadd| like
        |:vimgrepadd| and |:lgrepadd| like |:lvimgrepadd|.
        See also the section |:make_makeprg|, since most of the comments there
        apply equally to 'grepprg'.
        For Win32, the default is "findstr /n" if "findstr.exe" can be found,
        otherwise it's "grep -n".
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                        *'guicursor'* *'gcr'* *E545* *E546* *E548* *E549*
'guicursor' 'gcr'       string  (default "n-v-c:block-Cursor/lCursor,
                                        ve:ver35-Cursor,
                                        o:hor50-Cursor,
                                        i-ci:ver25-Cursor/lCursor,
                                        r-cr:hor20-Cursor/lCursor,
                                        sm:block-Cursor
                                        -blinkwait175-blinkoff150-blinkon175",
                                for MS-DOS and Win32 console:
                                        "n-v-c:block,o:hor50,i-ci:hor15,
                                        r-cr:hor30,sm:block")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with GUI enabled, and
                        for MS-DOS and Win32 console}
        This option tells Vim what the cursor should look like in different
        modes.  It fully works in the GUI.  In an MSDOS or Win32 console, only
        the height of the cursor can be changed.  This can be done by
        specifying a block cursor, or a percentage for a vertical or
        horizontal cursor.
        For a console the 't_SI' and 't_EI' escape sequences are used.

        The option is a comma separated list of parts.  Each part consist of a
        mode-list and an argument-list:
                mode-list:argument-list,mode-list:argument-list,..
        The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes:
                n       Normal mode
                v       Visual mode
                ve      Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
                        if not specified)
                o       Operator-pending mode
                i       Insert mode
                r       Replace mode
                c       Command-line Normal (append) mode
                ci      Command-line Insert mode
                cr      Command-line Replace mode
                sm      showmatch in Insert mode
                a       all modes
        The argument-list is a dash separated list of these arguments:
                hor{N}  horizontal bar, {N} percent of the character height
                ver{N}  vertical bar, {N} percent of the character width
                block   block cursor, fills the whole character
                        [only one of the above three should be present]
                blinkwait{N}                            *cursor-blinking*
                blinkon{N}
                blinkoff{N}
                        blink times for cursor: blinkwait is the delay before
                        the cursor starts blinking, blinkon is the time that
                        the cursor is shown and blinkoff is the time that the
                        cursor is not shown.  The times are in msec.  When one
                        of the numbers is zero, there is no blinking.  The
                        default is: "blinkwait700-blinkon400-blinkoff250".
                        These numbers are used for a missing entry.  This
                        means that blinking is enabled by default.  To switch
                        blinking off you can use "blinkon0".  The cursor only
                        blinks when Vim is waiting for input, not while
                        executing a command.
                        To make the cursor blink in an xterm, see
                        |xterm-blink|.
                {group-name}
                        a highlight group name, that sets the color and font
                        for the cursor
                {group-name}/{group-name}
                        Two highlight group names, the first is used when
                        no language mappings are used, the other when they
                        are. |language-mapping|

        Examples of parts:
           n-c-v:block-nCursor  in Normal, Command-line and Visual mode, use a
                                block cursor with colors from the "nCursor"
                                highlight group
           i-ci:ver30-iCursor-blinkwait300-blinkon200-blinkoff150
                                In Insert and Command-line Insert mode, use a
                                30% vertical bar cursor with colors from the
                                "iCursor" highlight group.  Blink a bit
                                faster.

        The 'a' mode is different.  It will set the given argument-list for
        all modes.  It does not reset anything to defaults.  This can be used
        to do a common setting for all modes.  For example, to switch off
        blinking: "a:blinkon0"

        Examples of cursor highlighting: >
            :highlight Cursor gui=reverse guifg=NONE guibg=NONE
            :highlight Cursor gui=NONE guifg=bg guibg=fg
<
                                        *'guifont'* *'gfn'*
                                                   *E235* *E596*
'guifont' 'gfn'         string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
        This is a list of fonts which will be used for the GUI version of Vim.
        In its simplest form the value is just one font name.  When
        the font cannot be found you will get an error message.  To try other
        font names a list can be specified, font names separated with commas.
        The first valid font is used.

        On systems where 'guifontset' is supported (X11) and 'guifontset' is
        not empty, then 'guifont' is not used.

        Spaces after a comma are ignored.  To include a comma in a font name
        precede it with a backslash.  Setting an option requires an extra
        backslash before a space and a backslash.  See also
        |option-backslash|.  For example: >
            :set guifont=Screen15,\ 7x13,font\\,with\\,commas
<       will make Vim try to use the font "Screen15" first, and if it fails it
        will try to use "7x13" and then "font,with,commas" instead.

        If none of the fonts can be loaded, Vim will keep the current setting.
        If an empty font list is given, Vim will try using other resource
        settings (for X, it will use the Vim.font resource), and finally it
        will try some builtin default which should always be there ("7x13" in
        the case of X).  The font names given should be "normal" fonts.  Vim
        will try to find the related bold and italic fonts.

        For Win32, GTK, Motif, Mac OS and Photon: >
            :set guifont=*
<       will bring up a font requester, where you can pick the font you want.

        The font name depends on the GUI used.  See |setting-guifont| for a
        way to set 'guifont' for various systems.

        For the GTK+ 2 GUI the font name looks like this: >
            :set guifont=Andale\ Mono\ 11
<       That's all.  XLFDs are not used.  For Chinese this is reported to work
        well: >
            if has("gui_gtk2")
              set guifont=Bitstream\ Vera\ Sans\ Mono\ 12,Fixed\ 12
              set guifontwide=Microsoft\ Yahei\ 12,WenQuanYi\ Zen\ Hei\ 12
            endif
<
        For Mac OSX you can use something like this: >
            :set guifont=Monaco:h10
<       Also see 'macatsui', it can help fix display problems.
                                                                *E236*
        Note that the fonts must be mono-spaced (all characters have the same
        width).  An exception is GTK 2: all fonts are accepted, but
        mono-spaced fonts look best.

        To preview a font on X11, you might be able to use the "xfontsel"
        program.  The "xlsfonts" program gives a list of all available fonts.

        For the Win32 GUI                                       *E244* *E245*
        - takes these options in the font name:
                hXX - height is XX (points, can be floating-point)
                wXX - width is XX (points, can be floating-point)
                b   - bold
                i   - italic
                u   - underline
                s   - strikeout
                cXX - character set XX.  Valid charsets are: ANSI, ARABIC,
                      BALTIC, CHINESEBIG5, DEFAULT, EASTEUROPE, GB2312, GREEK,
                      HANGEUL, HEBREW, JOHAB, MAC, OEM, RUSSIAN, SHIFTJIS,
                      SYMBOL, THAI, TURKISH, VIETNAMESE ANSI and BALTIC.
                      Normally you would use "cDEFAULT".

          Use a ':' to separate the options.
        - A '_' can be used in the place of a space, so you don't need to use
          backslashes to escape the spaces.
        - Examples: >
            :set guifont=courier_new:h12:w5:b:cRUSSIAN
            :set guifont=Andale_Mono:h7.5:w4.5
<       See also |font-sizes|.

                                        *'guifontset'* *'gfs'*
                                        *E250* *E252* *E234* *E597* *E598*
'guifontset' 'gfs'      string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and
                        with the |+xfontset| feature}
                        {not available in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
        When not empty, specifies two (or more) fonts to be used.  The first
        one for normal English, the second one for your special language.  See
        |xfontset|.
        Setting this option also means that all font names will be handled as
        a fontset name.  Also the ones used for the "font" argument of the
        |:highlight| command.
        The fonts must match with the current locale.  If fonts for the
        character sets that the current locale uses are not included, setting
        'guifontset' will fail.
        Note the difference between 'guifont' and 'guifontset': In 'guifont'
        the comma-separated names are alternative names, one of which will be
        used.  In 'guifontset' the whole string is one fontset name,
        including the commas.  It is not possible to specify alternative
        fontset names.
        This example works on many X11 systems: >
                :set guifontset=-*-*-medium-r-normal--16-*-*-*-c-*-*-*
<
                                *'guifontwide'* *'gfw'* *E231* *E533* *E534*
'guifontwide' 'gfw'     string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
        When not empty, specifies a comma-separated list of fonts to be used
        for double-width characters.  The first font that can be loaded is
        used.
        Note: The size of these fonts must be exactly twice as wide as the one
        specified with 'guifont' and the same height.

        All GUI versions but GTK+ 2:

        'guifontwide' is only used when 'encoding' is set to "utf-8" and
        'guifontset' is empty or invalid.
        When 'guifont' is set and a valid font is found in it and
        'guifontwide' is empty Vim will attempt to find a matching
        double-width font and set 'guifontwide' to it.

        GTK+ 2 GUI only:                        *guifontwide_gtk2*

        If set and valid, 'guifontwide' is always used for double width
        characters, even if 'encoding' is not set to "utf-8".
        Vim does not attempt to find an appropriate value for 'guifontwide'
        automatically.  If 'guifontwide' is empty Pango/Xft will choose the
        font for characters not available in 'guifont'.  Thus you do not need
        to set 'guifontwide' at all unless you want to override the choice
        made by Pango/Xft.

                                                *'guiheadroom'* *'ghr'*
'guiheadroom' 'ghr'     number  (default 50)
                        global
                        {not in Vi} {only for GTK and X11 GUI}
        The number of pixels subtracted from the screen height when fitting
        the GUI window on the screen.  Set this before the GUI is started,
        e.g., in your |gvimrc| file.  When zero, the whole screen height will
        be used by the window.  When positive, the specified number of pixel
        lines will be left for window decorations and other items on the
        screen.  Set it to a negative value to allow windows taller than the
        screen.

                                                *'guioptions'* *'go'*
'guioptions' 'go'       string  (default "egmrLtT"   (MS-Windows),
                                         "aegimrLtT" (GTK, Motif and Athena))
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
        This option only has an effect in the GUI version of Vim.  It is a
        sequence of letters which describes what components and options of the
        GUI should be used.
        To avoid problems with flags that are added in the future, use the
        "+=" and "-=" feature of ":set" |add-option-flags|.

        Valid letters are as follows:
                                                        *guioptions_a* *'go-a'*
          'a'   Autoselect:  If present, then whenever VISUAL mode is started,
                or the Visual area extended, Vim tries to become the owner of
                the windowing system's global selection.  This means that the
                Visually highlighted text is available for pasting into other
                applications as well as into Vim itself.  When the Visual mode
                ends, possibly due to an operation on the text, or when an
                application wants to paste the selection, the highlighted text
                is automatically yanked into the "* selection register.
                Thus the selection is still available for pasting into other
                applications after the VISUAL mode has ended.
                    If not present, then Vim won't become the owner of the
                windowing system's global selection unless explicitly told to
                by a yank or delete operation for the "* register.
                The same applies to the modeless selection.
                                                                *'go-A'*
          'A'   Autoselect for the modeless selection.  Like 'a', but only
                applies to the modeless selection.

                    'guioptions'   autoselect Visual  autoselect modeless ~
                         ""              -                       -
                         "a"            yes                     yes
                         "A"             -                      yes
                         "aA"           yes                     yes

                                                                *'go-c'*
          'c'   Use console dialogs instead of popup dialogs for simple
                choices.
                                                                *'go-e'*
          'e'   Add tab pages when indicated with 'showtabline'.
                'guitablabel' can be used to change the text in the labels.
                When 'e' is missing a non-GUI tab pages line may be used.
                The GUI tabs are only supported on some systems, currently
                GTK, Motif, Mac OS/X and MS-Windows.
                                                                *'go-f'*
          'f'   Foreground: Don't use fork() to detach the GUI from the shell
                where it was started.  Use this for programs that wait for the
                editor to finish (e.g., an e-mail program).  Alternatively you
                can use "gvim -f" or ":gui -f" to start the GUI in the
                foreground.  |gui-fork|
                Note: Set this option in the vimrc file.  The forking may have
                happened already when the |gvimrc| file is read.
                                                                *'go-i'*
          'i'   Use a Vim icon.  For GTK with KDE it is used in the left-upper
                corner of the window.  It's black&white on non-GTK, because of
                limitations of X11.  For a color icon, see |X11-icon|.
                                                                *'go-m'*
          'm'   Menu bar is present.
                                                                *'go-M'*
          'M'   The system menu "$VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim" is not sourced.  Note
                that this flag must be added in the .vimrc file, before
                switching on syntax or filetype recognition (when the |gvimrc|
                file is sourced the system menu has already been loaded; the
                ":syntax on" and ":filetype on" commands load the menu too).
                                                                *'go-g'*
          'g'   Grey menu items: Make menu items that are not active grey.  If
                'g' is not included inactive menu items are not shown at all.
                Exception: Athena will always use grey menu items.
                                                                *'go-t'*
          't'   Include tearoff menu items.  Currently only works for Win32,
                GTK+, and Motif 1.2 GUI.
                                                                *'go-T'*
          'T'   Include Toolbar.  Currently only in Win32, GTK+, Motif, Photon
                and Athena GUIs.
                                                                *'go-r'*
          'r'   Right-hand scrollbar is always present.
                                                                *'go-R'*
          'R'   Right-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
                split window.
                                                                *'go-l'*
          'l'   Left-hand scrollbar is always present.
                                                                *'go-L'*
          'L'   Left-hand scrollbar is present when there is a vertically
                split window.
                                                                *'go-b'*
          'b'   Bottom (horizontal) scrollbar is present.  Its size depends on
                the longest visible line, or on the cursor line if the 'h'
                flag is included. |gui-horiz-scroll|
                                                                *'go-h'*
          'h'   Limit horizontal scrollbar size to the length of the cursor
                line.  Reduces computations. |gui-horiz-scroll|

        And yes, you may even have scrollbars on the left AND the right if
        you really want to :-).  See |gui-scrollbars| for more information.

                                                                *'go-v'*
          'v'   Use a vertical button layout for dialogs.  When not included,
                a horizontal layout is preferred, but when it doesn't fit a
                vertical layout is used anyway.
                                                                *'go-p'*
          'p'   Use Pointer callbacks for X11 GUI.  This is required for some
                window managers.  If the cursor is not blinking or hollow at
                the right moment, try adding this flag.  This must be done
                before starting the GUI.  Set it in your |gvimrc|.  Adding or
                removing it after the GUI has started has no effect.
                                                                *'go-F'*
          'F'   Add a footer.  Only for Motif.  See |gui-footer|.


                                                *'guipty'* *'noguipty'*
'guipty'                boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with GUI enabled}
        Only in the GUI: If on, an attempt is made to open a pseudo-tty for
        I/O to/from shell commands.  See |gui-pty|.

                                                *'guitablabel'* *'gtl'*
'guitablabel' 'gtl'     string  (default empty)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and
                        with the |+windows| feature}
        When nonempty describes the text to use in a label of the GUI tab
        pages line.  When empty and when the result is empty Vim will use a
        default label.  See |setting-guitablabel| for more info.

        The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.
        'guitabtooltip' is used for the tooltip, see below.

        Only used when the GUI tab pages line is displayed.  'e' must be
        present in 'guioptions'.  For the non-GUI tab pages line 'tabline' is
        used.

                                                *'guitabtooltip'* *'gtt'*
'guitabtooltip' 'gtt'   string  (default empty)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with GUI enabled and
                        with the |+windows| feature}
        When nonempty describes the text to use in a tooltip for the GUI tab
        pages line.  When empty Vim will use a default tooltip.
        This option is otherwise just like 'guitablabel' above.
        You can include a line break.  Simplest method is to use |:let|: >
                :let &guitabtooltip = "line one\nline two"
<

                                                *'helpfile'* *'hf'*
'helpfile' 'hf'         string  (default (MSDOS)  "$VIMRUNTIME\doc\help.txt"
                                         (others) "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Name of the main help file.  All distributed help files should be
        placed together in one directory.  Additionally, all "doc" directories
        in 'runtimepath' will be used.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  For example:
        "$VIMRUNTIME/doc/help.txt".  If $VIMRUNTIME is not set, $VIM is also
        tried.  Also see |$VIMRUNTIME| and |option-backslash| about including
        spaces and backslashes.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'helpheight'* *'hh'*
'helpheight' 'hh'       number  (default 20)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
                        feature}
        Minimal initial height of the help window when it is opened with the
        ":help" command.  The initial height of the help window is half of the
        current window, or (when the 'ea' option is on) the same as other
        windows.  When the height is less than 'helpheight', the height is
        set to 'helpheight'.  Set to zero to disable.

                                                *'helplang'* *'hlg'*
'helplang' 'hlg'        string  (default: messages language or empty)
                        global
                        {only available when compiled with the |+multi_lang|
                        feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        Comma separated list of languages.  Vim will use the first language
        for which the desired help can be found.  The English help will always
        be used as a last resort.  You can add "en" to prefer English over
        another language, but that will only find tags that exist in that
        language and not in the English help.
        Example: >
                :set helplang=de,it
<       This will first search German, then Italian and finally English help
        files.
        When using |CTRL-]| and ":help!" in a non-English help file Vim will
        try to find the tag in the current language before using this option.
        See |help-translated|.

                                     *'hidden'* *'hid'* *'nohidden'* *'nohid'*
'hidden' 'hid'          boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When off a buffer is unloaded when it is |abandon|ed.  When on a
        buffer becomes hidden when it is |abandon|ed.  If the buffer is still
        displayed in another window, it does not become hidden, of course.
        The commands that move through the buffer list sometimes make a buffer
        hidden although the 'hidden' option is off: When the buffer is
        modified, 'autowrite' is off or writing is not possible, and the '!'
        flag was used.  See also |windows.txt|.
        To only make one buffer hidden use the 'bufhidden' option.
        This option is set for one command with ":hide {command}" |:hide|.
        WARNING: It's easy to forget that you have changes in hidden buffers.
        Think twice when using ":q!" or ":qa!".

                                                *'highlight'* *'hl'*
'highlight' 'hl'        string  (default (as a single string):
                                     "8:SpecialKey,@:NonText,d:Directory,
                                     e:ErrorMsg,i:IncSearch,l:Search,m:MoreMsg,
                                     M:ModeMsg,n:LineNr,r:Question,
                                     s:StatusLine,S:StatusLineNC,c:VertSplit,
                                     t:Title,v:Visual,w:WarningMsg,W:WildMenu,
                                     f:Folded,F:FoldColumn,A:DiffAdd,
                                     C:DiffChange,D:DiffDelete,T:DiffText,
                                     >:SignColumn,B:SpellBad,P:SpellCap,
                                     R:SpellRare,L:SpellLocal,-:Conceal,
                                     +:Pmenu,=:PmenuSel,
                                     x:PmenuSbar,X:PmenuThumb")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        This option can be used to set highlighting mode for various
        occasions.  It is a comma separated list of character pairs.  The
        first character in a pair gives the occasion, the second the mode to
        use for that occasion.  The occasions are:
        |hl-SpecialKey|  8  Meta and special keys listed with ":map"
        |hl-NonText|     @  '~' and '@' at the end of the window and
                            characters from 'showbreak'
        |hl-Directory|   d  directories in CTRL-D listing and other special
                            things in listings
        |hl-ErrorMsg|    e  error messages
                         h  (obsolete, ignored)
        |hl-IncSearch|   i  'incsearch' highlighting
        |hl-Search|      l  last search pattern highlighting (see 'hlsearch')
        |hl-MoreMsg|     m  |more-prompt|
        |hl-ModeMsg|     M  Mode (e.g., "-- INSERT --")
        |hl-LineNr|      n  line number for ":number" and ":#" commands, and
                            when 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set.
        |hl-Question|    r  |hit-enter| prompt and yes/no questions
        |hl-StatusLine|  s  status line of current window |status-line|
        |hl-StatusLineNC| S  status lines of not-current windows
        |hl-Title|       t  Titles for output from ":set all", ":autocmd" etc.
        |hl-VertSplit|   c  column used to separate vertically split windows
        |hl-Visual|      v  Visual mode
        |hl-VisualNOS|   V  Visual mode when Vim does is "Not Owning the
                            Selection" Only X11 Gui's |gui-x11| and
                            |xterm-clipboard|.
        |hl-WarningMsg|  w  warning messages
        |hl-WildMenu|    W  wildcard matches displayed for 'wildmenu'
        |hl-Folded|      f  line used for closed folds
        |hl-FoldColumn|  F  'foldcolumn'
        |hl-DiffAdd|     A  added line in diff mode
        |hl-DiffChange|  C  changed line in diff mode
        |hl-DiffDelete|  D  deleted line in diff mode
        |hl-DiffText|    T  inserted text in diff mode
        |hl-SignColumn|  >  column used for |signs|
        |hl-SpellBad|    B  misspelled word |spell|
        |hl-SpellCap|    P  word that should start with capital |spell|
        |hl-SpellRare|   R  rare word |spell|
        |hl-SpellLocal|  L  word from other region |spell|
        |hl-Conceal|     -  the placeholders used for concealed characters
                            (see 'conceallevel')
        |hl-Pmenu|       +  popup menu normal line
        |hl-PmenuSel|    =  popup menu normal line
        |hl-PmenuSbar|   x  popup menu scrollbar
        |hl-PmenuThumb|  X  popup menu scrollbar thumb

        The display modes are:
                r       reverse         (termcap entry "mr" and "me")
                i       italic          (termcap entry "ZH" and "ZR")
                b       bold            (termcap entry "md" and "me")
                s       standout        (termcap entry "so" and "se")
                u       underline       (termcap entry "us" and "ue")
                c       undercurl       (termcap entry "Cs" and "Ce")
                n       no highlighting
                -       no highlighting
                :       use a highlight group
        The default is used for occasions that are not included.
        If you want to change what the display modes do, see |dos-colors|
        for an example.
        When using the ':' display mode, this must be followed by the name of
        a highlight group.  A highlight group can be used to define any type
        of highlighting, including using color.  See |:highlight| on how to
        define one.  The default uses a different group for each occasion.
        See |highlight-default| for the default highlight groups.

                                 *'hlsearch'* *'hls'* *'nohlsearch'* *'nohls'*
'hlsearch' 'hls'        boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the
                        |+extra_search| feature}
        When there is a previous search pattern, highlight all its matches.
        The type of highlighting used can be set with the 'l' occasion in the
        'highlight' option.  This uses the "Search" highlight group by
        default.  Note that only the matching text is highlighted, any offsets
        are not applied.
        See also: 'incsearch' and |:match|.
        When you get bored looking at the highlighted matches, you can turn it
        off with |:nohlsearch|.  This does not change the option value, as
        soon as you use a search command, the highlighting comes back.
        'redrawtime' specifies the maximum time spent on finding matches.
        When the search pattern can match an end-of-line, Vim will try to
        highlight all of the matched text.  However, this depends on where the
        search starts.  This will be the first line in the window or the first
        line below a closed fold.  A match in a previous line which is not
        drawn may not continue in a newly drawn line.
        You can specify whether the highlight status is restored on startup
        with the 'h' flag in 'viminfo' |viminfo-h|.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'history'* *'hi'*
'history' 'hi'          number  (Vim default: 20, Vi default: 0)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        A history of ":" commands, and a history of previous search patterns
        are remembered.  This option decides how many entries may be stored in
        each of these histories (see |cmdline-editing|).
        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                         *'hkmap'* *'hk'* *'nohkmap'* *'nohk'*
'hkmap' 'hk'            boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
                        feature}
        When on, the keyboard is mapped for the Hebrew character set.
        Normally you would set 'allowrevins' and use CTRL-_ in insert mode to
        toggle this option.  See |rileft.txt|.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                 *'hkmapp'* *'hkp'* *'nohkmapp'* *'nohkp'*
'hkmapp' 'hkp'          boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
                        feature}
        When on, phonetic keyboard mapping is used.  'hkmap' must also be on.
        This is useful if you have a non-Hebrew keyboard.
        See |rileft.txt|.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'icon'* *'noicon'*
'icon'                  boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+title|
                        feature}
        When on, the icon text of the window will be set to the value of
        'iconstring' (if it is not empty), or to the name of the file
        currently being edited.  Only the last part of the name is used.
        Overridden by the 'iconstring' option.
        Only works if the terminal supports setting window icons (currently
        only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option - these are
        Unix xterm and iris-ansi by default, where 't_IS' is taken from the
        builtin termcap).
        When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
        restored if possible |X11|.  See |X11-icon| for changing the icon on
        X11.

                                                *'iconstring'*
'iconstring'            string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+title|
                        feature}
        When this option is not empty, it will be used for the icon text of
        the window.  This happens only when the 'icon' option is on.
        Only works if the terminal supports setting window icon text
        (currently only X11 GUI and terminals with a non-empty 't_IS' option).
        Does not work for MS Windows.
        When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original icon will be
        restored if possible |X11|.
        When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
        expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.  See
        'titlestring' for example settings.
        {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}

                        *'ignorecase'* *'ic'* *'noignorecase'* *'noic'*
'ignorecase' 'ic'       boolean (default off)
                        global
        Ignore case in search patterns.  Also used when searching in the tags
        file.
        Also see 'smartcase'.
        Can be overruled by using "\c" or "\C" in the pattern, see
        |/ignorecase|.

                                                *'imactivatekey'* *'imak'*
'imactivatekey' 'imak'  string (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with |+xim| and
                        |+GUI_GTK|}                             *E599*
        Specifies the key that your Input Method in X-Windows uses for
        activation.  When this is specified correctly, vim can fully control
        IM with 'imcmdline', 'iminsert' and 'imsearch'.
        You can't use this option to change the activation key, the option
        tells Vim what the key is.
        Format:
                [MODIFIER_FLAG-]KEY_STRING

        These characters can be used for MODIFIER_FLAG (case is ignored):
                S           Shift key
                L           Lock key
                C           Control key
                1           Mod1 key
                2           Mod2 key
                3           Mod3 key
                4           Mod4 key
                5           Mod5 key
        Combinations are allowed, for example "S-C-space" or "SC-space" are
        both shift+ctrl+space.
        See <X11/keysymdef.h> and XStringToKeysym for KEY_STRING.

        Example: >
                :set imactivatekey=S-space
<       "S-space" means shift+space.  This is the activation key for kinput2 +
        canna (Japanese), and ami (Korean).

                                *'imcmdline'* *'imc'* *'noimcmdline'* *'noimc'*
'imcmdline' 'imc'       boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+xim|,
                        |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| features}
        When set the Input Method is always on when starting to edit a command
        line, unless entering a search pattern (see 'imsearch' for that).
        Setting this option is useful when your input method allows entering
        English characters directly, e.g., when it's used to type accented
        characters with dead keys.

                                *'imdisable'* *'imd'* *'noimdisable'* *'noimd'*
'imdisable' 'imd'       boolean (default off, on for some systems (SGI))
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+xim|,
                        |+multi_byte_ime| or |global-ime| features}
        When set the Input Method is never used.  This is useful to disable
        the IM when it doesn't work properly.
        Currently this option is on by default for SGI/IRIX machines.  This
        may change in later releases.

                                                *'iminsert'* *'imi'*
'iminsert' 'imi'        number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used in
        Insert mode.  Valid values:
                0       :lmap is off and IM is off
                1       :lmap is ON and IM is off
                2       :lmap is off and IM is ON
        2 is available only when compiled with the |+multi_byte_ime|, |+xim|
        or |global-ime|.
        To always reset the option to zero when leaving Insert mode with <Esc>
        this can be used: >
                :inoremap <ESC> <ESC>:set iminsert=0<CR>
<       This makes :lmap and IM turn off automatically when leaving Insert
        mode.
        Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Insert mode
        |i_CTRL-^|.
        The value is set to 1 when setting 'keymap' to a valid keymap name.
        It is also used for the argument of commands like "r" and "f".
        The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
        methods.  Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.

                                                *'imsearch'* *'ims'*
'imsearch' 'ims'        number (default 0, 2 when an input method is supported)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        Specifies whether :lmap or an Input Method (IM) is to be used when
        entering a search pattern.  Valid values:
                -1      the value of 'iminsert' is used, makes it look like
                        'iminsert' is also used when typing a search pattern
                0       :lmap is off and IM is off
                1       :lmap is ON and IM is off
                2       :lmap is off and IM is ON
        Note that this option changes when using CTRL-^ in Command-line mode
        |c_CTRL-^|.
        The value is set to 1 when it is not -1 and setting the 'keymap'
        option to a valid keymap name.
        The value 0 may not work correctly with Athena and Motif with some XIM
        methods.  Use 'imdisable' to disable XIM then.

                                                *'include'* *'inc'*
'include' 'inc'         string  (default "^\s*#\s*include")
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the
                        |+find_in_path| feature}
        Pattern to be used to find an include command.  It is a search
        pattern, just like for the "/" command (See |pattern|).  The default
        value is for C programs.  This option is used for the commands "[i",
        "]I", "[d", etc.
        Normally the 'isfname' option is used to recognize the file name that
        comes after the matched pattern.  But if "\zs" appears in the pattern
        then the text matched from "\zs" to the end, or until "\ze" if it
        appears, is used as the file name.  Use this to include characters
        that are not in 'isfname', such as a space.  You can then use
        'includeexpr' to process the matched text.
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.

                                                *'includeexpr'* *'inex'*
'includeexpr' 'inex'    string  (default "")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the
                        |+find_in_path| or |+eval| features}
        Expression to be used to transform the string found with the 'include'
        option to a file name.  Mostly useful to change "." to "/" for Java: >
                :set includeexpr=substitute(v:fname,'\\.','/','g')
<       The "v:fname" variable will be set to the file name that was detected.

        Also used for the |gf| command if an unmodified file name can't be
        found.  Allows doing "gf" on the name after an 'include' statement.
        Also used for |<cfile>|.

        The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
        |sandbox-option|.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        evaluating 'includeexpr' |textlock|.

                                 *'incsearch'* *'is'* *'noincsearch'* *'nois'*
'incsearch' 'is'        boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the
                        |+extra_search| features}
        While typing a search command, show where the pattern, as it was typed
        so far, matches.  The matched string is highlighted.  If the pattern
        is invalid or not found, nothing is shown.  The screen will be updated
        often, this is only useful on fast terminals.
        Note that the match will be shown, but the cursor will return to its
        original position when no match is found and when pressing <Esc>.  You
        still need to finish the search command with <Enter> to move the
        cursor to the match.
        When compiled with the |+reltime| feature Vim only searches for about
        half a second.  With a complicated pattern and/or a lot of text the
        match may not be found.  This is to avoid that Vim hangs while you
        are typing the pattern.
        The highlighting can be set with the 'i' flag in 'highlight'.
        See also: 'hlsearch'.
        CTRL-L can be used to add one character from after the current match
        to the command line.  If 'ignorecase' and 'smartcase' are set and the
        command line has no uppercase characters, the added character is
        converted to lowercase.
        CTRL-R CTRL-W can be used to add the word at the end of the current
        match, excluding the characters that were already typed.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'indentexpr'* *'inde'*
'indentexpr' 'inde'     string  (default "")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
                        or |+eval| features}
        Expression which is evaluated to obtain the proper indent for a line.
        It is used when a new line is created, for the |=| operator and
        in Insert mode as specified with the 'indentkeys' option.
        When this option is not empty, it overrules the 'cindent' and
        'smartindent' indenting.  When 'lisp' is set, this option is
        overridden by the Lisp indentation algorithm.
        When 'paste' is set this option is not used for indenting.
        The expression is evaluated with |v:lnum| set to the line number for
        which the indent is to be computed.  The cursor is also in this line
        when the expression is evaluated (but it may be moved around).
        The expression must return the number of spaces worth of indent.  It
        can return "-1" to keep the current indent (this means 'autoindent' is
        used for the indent).
        Functions useful for computing the indent are |indent()|, |cindent()|
        and |lispindent()|.
        The evaluation of the expression must not have side effects!  It must
        not change the text, jump to another window, etc.  Afterwards the
        cursor position is always restored, thus the cursor may be moved.
        Normally this option would be set to call a function: >
                :set indentexpr=GetMyIndent()
<       Error messages will be suppressed, unless the 'debug' option contains
        "msg".
        See |indent-expression|.
        NOTE: This option is made empty when 'compatible' is set.

        The expression may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
        |sandbox-option|.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        evaluating 'indentexpr' |textlock|.


                                                *'indentkeys'* *'indk'*
'indentkeys' 'indk'     string  (default "0{,0},:,0#,!^F,o,O,e")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+cindent|
                        feature}
        A list of keys that, when typed in Insert mode, cause reindenting of
        the current line.  Only happens if 'indentexpr' isn't empty.
        The format is identical to 'cinkeys', see |indentkeys-format|.
        See |C-indenting| and |indent-expression|.

                        *'infercase'* *'inf'* *'noinfercase'* *'noinf'*
'infercase' 'inf'       boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        When doing keyword completion in insert mode |ins-completion|, and
        'ignorecase' is also on, the case of the match is adjusted depending
        on the typed text.  If the typed text contains a lowercase letter
        where the match has an upper case letter, the completed part is made
        lowercase.  If the typed text has no lowercase letters and the match
        has a lowercase letter where the typed text has an uppercase letter,
        and there is a letter before it, the completed part is made uppercase.
        With 'noinfercase' the match is used as-is.

                        *'insertmode'* *'im'* *'noinsertmode'* *'noim'*
'insertmode' 'im'       boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Makes Vim work in a way that Insert mode is the default mode.  Useful
        if you want to use Vim as a modeless editor.  Used for |evim|.
        These Insert mode commands will be useful:
        - Use the cursor keys to move around.
        - Use CTRL-O to execute one Normal mode command |i_CTRL-O|).  When
          this is a mapping, it is executed as if 'insertmode' was off.
          Normal mode remains active until the mapping is finished.
        - Use CTRL-L to execute a number of Normal mode commands, then use
          <Esc> to get back to Insert mode.  Note that CTRL-L moves the cursor
          left, like <Esc> does when 'insertmode' isn't set.  |i_CTRL-L|

        These items change when 'insertmode' is set:
        - when starting to edit of a file, Vim goes to Insert mode.
        - <Esc> in Insert mode is a no-op and beeps.
        - <Esc> in Normal mode makes Vim go to Insert mode.
        - CTRL-L in Insert mode is a command, it is not inserted.
        - CTRL-Z in Insert mode suspends Vim, see |CTRL-Z|.     *i_CTRL-Z*
        However, when <Esc> is used inside a mapping, it behaves like
        'insertmode' was not set.  This was done to be able to use the same
        mappings with 'insertmode' set or not set.
        When executing commands with |:normal| 'insertmode' is not used.

        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'isfname'* *'isf'*
'isfname' 'isf'         string  (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
                             "@,48-57,/,\,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,{,},[,],:,@-@,!,~,="
                            for AMIGA: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,$,:"
                            for VMS: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,<,>,[,],:,;,~"
                            for OS/390: "@,240-249,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,="
                            otherwise: "@,48-57,/,.,-,_,+,,,#,$,%,~,=")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        The characters specified by this option are included in file names and
        path names.  Filenames are used for commands like "gf", "[i" and in
        the tags file.  It is also used for "\f" in a |pattern|.
        Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
        characters up to 255 are specified with this option.
        For UTF-8 the characters 0xa0 to 0xff are included as well.
        Think twice before adding white space to this option.  Although a
        space may appear inside a file name, the effect will be that Vim
        doesn't know where a file name starts or ends when doing completion.
        It most likely works better without a space in 'isfname'.

        Note that on systems using a backslash as path separator, Vim tries to
        do its best to make it work as you would expect.  That is a bit
        tricky, since Vi originally used the backslash to escape special
        characters.  Vim will not remove a backslash in front of a normal file
        name character on these systems, but it will on Unix and alikes.  The
        '&' and '^' are not included by default, because these are special for
        cmd.exe.

        The format of this option is a list of parts, separated with commas.
        Each part can be a single character number or a range.  A range is two
        character numbers with '-' in between.  A character number can be a
        decimal number between 0 and 255 or the ASCII character itself (does
        not work for digits).  Example:
                "_,-,128-140,#-43"      (include '_' and '-' and the range
                                        128 to 140 and '#' to 43)
        If a part starts with '^', the following character number or range
        will be excluded from the option.  The option is interpreted from left
        to right.  Put the excluded character after the range where it is
        included.  To include '^' itself use it as the last character of the
        option or the end of a range.  Example:
                "^a-z,#,^"      (exclude 'a' to 'z', include '#' and '^')
        If the character is '@', all characters where isalpha() returns TRUE
        are included.  Normally these are the characters a to z and A to Z,
        plus accented characters.  To include '@' itself use "@-@".  Examples:
                "@,^a-z"        All alphabetic characters, excluding lower
                                case ASCII letters.
                "a-z,A-Z,@-@"   All letters plus the '@' character.
        A comma can be included by using it where a character number is
        expected.  Example:
                "48-57,,,_"     Digits, comma and underscore.
        A comma can be excluded by prepending a '^'.  Example:
                " -~,^,,9"      All characters from space to '~', excluding
                                comma, plus <Tab>.
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.

                                                *'isident'* *'isi'*
'isident' 'isi'         string  (default for MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2:
                                           "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
                                otherwise: "@,48-57,_,192-255")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        The characters given by this option are included in identifiers.
        Identifiers are used in recognizing environment variables and after a
        match of the 'define' option.  It is also used for "\i" in a
        |pattern|.  See 'isfname' for a description of the format of this
        option.
        Careful: If you change this option, it might break expanding
        environment variables.  E.g., when '/' is included and Vim tries to
        expand "$HOME/.viminfo".  Maybe you should change 'iskeyword' instead.

                                                *'iskeyword'* *'isk'*
'iskeyword' 'isk'       string (Vim default for MS-DOS and Win32:
                                            "@,48-57,_,128-167,224-235"
                                   otherwise:  "@,48-57,_,192-255"
                                Vi default: "@,48-57,_")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        Keywords are used in searching and recognizing with many commands:
        "w", "*", "[i", etc.  It is also used for "\k" in a |pattern|.  See
        'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.  For C
        programs you could use "a-z,A-Z,48-57,_,.,-,>".
        For a help file it is set to all non-blank printable characters except
        '*', '"' and '|' (so that CTRL-] on a command finds the help for that
        command).
        When the 'lisp' option is on the '-' character is always included.
        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                                *'isprint'* *'isp'*
'isprint' 'isp' string  (default for MS-DOS, Win32, OS/2 and Macintosh:
                                "@,~-255"; otherwise: "@,161-255")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        The characters given by this option are displayed directly on the
        screen.  It is also used for "\p" in a |pattern|.  The characters from
        space (ASCII 32) to '~' (ASCII 126) are always displayed directly,
        even when they are not included in 'isprint' or excluded.  See
        'isfname' for a description of the format of this option.

        Non-printable characters are displayed with two characters:
                  0 -  31       "^@" - "^_"
                 32 - 126       always single characters
                   127          "^?"
                128 - 159       "~@" - "~_"
                160 - 254       "| " - "|~"
                   255          "~?"
        When 'encoding' is a Unicode one, illegal bytes from 128 to 255 are
        displayed as <xx>, with the hexadecimal value of the byte.
        When 'display' contains "uhex" all unprintable characters are
        displayed as <xx>.
        The SpecialKey highlighting will be used for unprintable characters.
        |hl-SpecialKey|

        Multi-byte characters 256 and above are always included, only the
        characters up to 255 are specified with this option.  When a character
        is printable but it is not available in the current font, a
        replacement character will be shown.
        Unprintable and zero-width Unicode characters are displayed as <xxxx>.
        There is no option to specify these characters.

                        *'joinspaces'* *'js'* *'nojoinspaces'* *'nojs'*
'joinspaces' 'js'       boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Insert two spaces after a '.', '?' and '!' with a join command.
        When 'cpoptions' includes the 'j' flag, only do this after a '.'.
        Otherwise only one space is inserted.
        NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.

                                                        *'key'*
'key'                   string  (default "")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+cryptv|
                        feature}
        The key that is used for encrypting and decrypting the current buffer.
        See |encryption| and 'cryptmethod'.
        Careful: Do not set the key value by hand, someone might see the typed
        key.  Use the |:X| command.  But you can make 'key' empty: >
                :set key=
<       It is not possible to get the value of this option with ":set key" or
        "echo &key".  This is to avoid showing it to someone who shouldn't
        know.  It also means you cannot see it yourself once you have set it,
        be careful not to make a typing error!
        You can use "&key" in an expression to detect whether encryption is
        enabled.  When 'key' is set it returns "*****" (five stars).

                                        *'keymap'* *'kmp'* *E544*
'keymap' 'kmp'          string  (default "")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+keymap|
                        feature}
        Name of a keyboard mapping.  See |mbyte-keymap|.
        Setting this option to a valid keymap name has the side effect of
        setting 'iminsert' to one, so that the keymap becomes effective.
        'imsearch' is also set to one, unless it was -1
        Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

                                        *'keymodel'* *'km'*
'keymodel' 'km'         string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        List of comma separated words, which enable special things that keys
        can do.  These values can be used:
           startsel     Using a shifted special key starts selection (either
                        Select mode or Visual mode, depending on "key" being
                        present in 'selectmode').
           stopsel      Using a not-shifted special key stops selection.
        Special keys in this context are the cursor keys, <End>, <Home>,
        <PageUp> and <PageDown>.
        The 'keymodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.

                                        *'keywordprg'* *'kp'*
'keywordprg' 'kp'       string  (default "man" or "man -s",  DOS: ":help",
                                                OS/2: "view /", VMS: "help")
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
        Program to use for the |K| command.  Environment variables are
        expanded |:set_env|.  ":help" may be used to access the Vim internal
        help.  (Note that previously setting the global option to the empty
        value did this, which is now deprecated.)
        When "man" is used, Vim will automatically translate a count for the
        "K" command to a section number.  Also for "man -s", in which case the
        "-s" is removed when there is no count.
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
        Example: >
                :set keywordprg=man\ -s
<       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                        *'langmap'* *'lmap'* *E357* *E358*
'langmap' 'lmap'        string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+langmap|
                        feature}
        This option allows switching your keyboard into a special language
        mode.  When you are typing text in Insert mode the characters are
        inserted directly.  When in command mode the 'langmap' option takes
        care of translating these special characters to the original meaning
        of the key.  This means you don't have to change the keyboard mode to
        be able to execute Normal mode commands.
        This is the opposite of the 'keymap' option, where characters are
        mapped in Insert mode.

        Example (for Greek, in UTF-8):                          *greek*  >
            :set langmap=ΑA,ΒB,ΨC,ΔD,ΕE,ΦF,ΓG,ΗH,ΙI,ΞJ,ΚK,ΛL,ΜM,ΝN,ΟO,ΠP,QQ,ΡR,ΣS,ΤT,ΘU,ΩV,WW,ΧX,ΥY,ΖZ,αa,βb,ψc,δd,εe,φf,γg,ηh,ιi,ξj,κk,λl,μm,νn,οo,πp,qq,ρr,σs,τt,θu,ωv,ςw,χx,υy,ζz
<       Example (exchanges meaning of z and y for commands): >
            :set langmap=zy,yz,ZY,YZ
<
        The 'langmap' option is a list of parts, separated with commas.  Each
        part can be in one of two forms:
        1.  A list of pairs.  Each pair is a "from" character immediately
            followed by the "to" character.  Examples: "aA", "aAbBcC".
        2.  A list of "from" characters, a semi-colon and a list of "to"
            characters.  Example: "abc;ABC"
        Example: "aA,fgh;FGH,cCdDeE"
        Special characters need to be preceded with a backslash.  These are
        ";", ',' and backslash itself.

        This will allow you to activate vim actions without having to switch
        back and forth between the languages.  Your language characters will
        be understood as normal vim English characters (according to the
        langmap mappings) in the following cases:
         o Normal/Visual mode (commands, buffer/register names, user mappings)
         o Insert/Replace Mode: Register names after CTRL-R
         o Insert/Replace Mode: Mappings
        Characters entered in Command-line mode will NOT be affected by
        this option.   Note that this option can be changed at any time
        allowing to switch between mappings for different languages/encodings.
        Use a mapping to avoid having to type it each time!

                                        *'langmenu'* *'lm'*
'langmenu' 'lm'         string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+menu| and
                        |+multi_lang| features}
        Language to use for menu translation.  Tells which file is loaded
        from the "lang" directory in 'runtimepath': >
                "lang/menu_" . &langmenu . ".vim"
<       (without the spaces).  For example, to always use the Dutch menus, no
        matter what $LANG is set to: >
                :set langmenu=nl_NL.ISO_8859-1
<       When 'langmenu' is empty, |v:lang| is used.
        Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.
        If your $LANG is set to a non-English language but you do want to use
        the English menus: >
                :set langmenu=none
<       This option must be set before loading menus, switching on filetype
        detection or syntax highlighting.  Once the menus are defined setting
        this option has no effect.  But you could do this: >
                :source $VIMRUNTIME/delmenu.vim
                :set langmenu=de_DE.ISO_8859-1
                :source $VIMRUNTIME/menu.vim
<       Warning: This deletes all menus that you defined yourself!

                                        *'laststatus'* *'ls'*
'laststatus' 'ls'       number  (default 1)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        The value of this option influences when the last window will have a
        status line:
                0: never
                1: only if there are at least two windows
                2: always
        The screen looks nicer with a status line if you have several
        windows, but it takes another screen line. |status-line|

                        *'lazyredraw'* *'lz'* *'nolazyredraw'* *'nolz'*
'lazyredraw' 'lz'       boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When this option is set, the screen will not be redrawn while
        executing macros, registers and other commands that have not been
        typed.  Also, updating the window title is postponed.  To force an
        update use |:redraw|.

                        *'linebreak'* *'lbr'* *'nolinebreak'* *'nolbr'*
'linebreak' 'lbr'       boolean (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
                        feature}
        If on Vim will wrap long lines at a character in 'breakat' rather
        than at the last character that fits on the screen.  Unlike
        'wrapmargin' and 'textwidth', this does not insert <EOL>s in the file,
        it only affects the way the file is displayed, not its contents.  The
        value of 'showbreak' is used to put in front of wrapped lines.
        This option is not used when the 'wrap' option is off or 'list' is on.
        Note that <Tab> characters after an <EOL> are mostly not displayed
        with the right amount of white space.

                                                *'lines'* *E593*
'lines'                 number  (default 24 or terminal height)
                        global
        Number of lines of the Vim window.
        Normally you don't need to set this.  It is done automatically by the
        terminal initialization code.  Also see |posix-screen-size|.
        When Vim is running in the GUI or in a resizable window, setting this
        option will cause the window size to be changed.  When you only want
        to use the size for the GUI, put the command in your |gvimrc| file.
        Vim limits the number of lines to what fits on the screen.  You can
        use this command to get the tallest window possible: >
                :set lines=999
<       Minimum value is 2, maximum value is 1000.
        If you get less lines than expected, check the 'guiheadroom' option.
        When you set this option and Vim is unable to change the physical
        number of lines of the display, the display may be messed up.

                                                *'linespace'* *'lsp'*
'linespace' 'lsp'       number  (default 0, 1 for Win32 GUI)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only in the GUI}
        Number of pixel lines inserted between characters.  Useful if the font
        uses the full character cell height, making lines touch each other.
        When non-zero there is room for underlining.
        With some fonts there can be too much room between lines (to have
        space for ascents and descents).  Then it makes sense to set
        'linespace' to a negative value.  This may cause display problems
        though!

                                                *'lisp'* *'nolisp'*
'lisp'                  boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
                        feature}
        Lisp mode: When <Enter> is typed in insert mode set the indent for
        the next line to Lisp standards (well, sort of).  Also happens with
        "cc" or "S".  'autoindent' must also be on for this to work.  The 'p'
        flag in 'cpoptions' changes the method of indenting: Vi compatible or
        better.  Also see 'lispwords'.
        The '-' character is included in keyword characters.  Redefines the
        "=" operator to use this same indentation algorithm rather than
        calling an external program if 'equalprg' is empty.
        This option is not used when 'paste' is set.
        {Vi: Does it a little bit differently}

                                                *'lispwords'* *'lw'*
'lispwords' 'lw'        string  (default is very long)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+lispindent|
                        feature}
        Comma separated list of words that influence the Lisp indenting.
        |'lisp'|

                                                *'list'* *'nolist'*
'list'                  boolean (default off)
                        local to window
        List mode: Show tabs as CTRL-I is displayed, display $ after end of
        line.  Useful to see the difference between tabs and spaces and for
        trailing blanks.  Further changed by the 'listchars' option.

        The cursor is displayed at the start of the space a Tab character
        occupies, not at the end as usual in Normal mode.  To get this cursor
        position while displaying Tabs with spaces, use: >
                :set list lcs=tab\ \ 
<
        Note that list mode will also affect formatting (set with 'textwidth'
        or 'wrapmargin') when 'cpoptions' includes 'L'.  See 'listchars' for
        changing the way tabs are displayed.

                                                *'listchars'* *'lcs'*
'listchars' 'lcs'       string  (default "eol:$")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Strings to use in 'list' mode and for the |:list| command.  It is a
        comma separated list of string settings.
          eol:c         Character to show at the end of each line.  When
                        omitted, there is no extra character at the end of the
                        line.
          tab:xy        Two characters to be used to show a tab.  The first
                        char is used once.  The second char is repeated to
                        fill the space that the tab normally occupies.
                        "tab:>-" will show a tab that takes four spaces as
                        ">---".  When omitted, a tab is show as ^I.
          trail:c       Character to show for trailing spaces.  When omitted,
                        trailing spaces are blank.
          extends:c     Character to show in the last column, when 'wrap' is
                        off and the line continues beyond the right of the
                        screen.
          precedes:c    Character to show in the first column, when 'wrap'
                        is off and there is text preceding the character
                        visible in the first column.
          conceal:c     Character to show in place of concealed text, when
                        'conceallevel' is set to 1.
          nbsp:c        Character to show for a non-breakable space (character
                        0xA0, 160).  Left blank when omitted.

        The characters ':' and ',' should not be used.  UTF-8 characters can
        be used when 'encoding' is "utf-8", otherwise only printable
        characters are allowed.  All characters must be single width.

        Examples: >
            :set lcs=tab:>-,trail:-
            :set lcs=tab:>-,eol:<,nbsp:%
            :set lcs=extends:>,precedes:<
<       The "NonText" highlighting will be used for "eol", "extends" and
        "precedes".  "SpecialKey" for "nbsp", "tab" and "trail".
        |hl-NonText| |hl-SpecialKey|

                        *'lpl'* *'nolpl'* *'loadplugins'* *'noloadplugins'*
'loadplugins' 'lpl'     boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When on the plugin scripts are loaded when starting up |load-plugins|.
        This option can be reset in your |vimrc| file to disable the loading
        of plugins.
        Note that using the "-u NONE" and "--noplugin" command line arguments
        reset this option. |-u| |--noplugin|

                                                *'macatsui'* *'nomacatsui'*
'macatsui'              boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {only available in Mac GUI version}
        This is a workaround for when drawing doesn't work properly.  When set
        and compiled with multi-byte support ATSUI text drawing is used.  When
        not set ATSUI text drawing is not used.  Switch this option off when
        you experience drawing problems.  In a future version the problems may
        be solved and this option becomes obsolete.  Therefore use this method
        to unset it: >
                if exists('&macatsui')
                   set nomacatsui
                endif
<       Another option to check if you have drawing problems is
        'termencoding'.

                                                *'magic'* *'nomagic'*
'magic'                 boolean (default on)
                        global
        Changes the special characters that can be used in search patterns.
        See |pattern|.
        NOTE: To avoid portability problems with using patterns, always keep
        this option at the default "on".  Only switch it off when working with
        old Vi scripts.  In any other situation write patterns that work when
        'magic' is on.  Include "\M" when you want to |/\M|.

                                                *'makeef'* *'mef'*
'makeef' 'mef'          string  (default: "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
                        feature}
        Name of the errorfile for the |:make| command (see |:make_makeprg|)
        and the |:grep| command.
        When it is empty, an internally generated temp file will be used.
        When "##" is included, it is replaced by a number to make the name
        unique.  This makes sure that the ":make" command doesn't overwrite an
        existing file.
        NOT used for the ":cf" command.  See 'errorfile' for that.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'makeprg'* *'mp'*
'makeprg' 'mp'          string  (default "make", VMS: "MMS")
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
        Program to use for the ":make" command.  See |:make_makeprg|.
        This option may contain '%' and '#' characters, which are expanded to
        the current and alternate file name. |:_%| |:_#|
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  See |option-backslash|
        about including spaces and backslashes.
        Note that a '|' must be escaped twice: once for ":set" and once for
        the interpretation of a command.  When you use a filter called
        "myfilter" do it like this: >
            :set makeprg=gmake\ \\\|\ myfilter
<       The placeholder "$*" can be given (even multiple times) to specify
        where the arguments will be included, for example: >
            :set makeprg=latex\ \\\\nonstopmode\ \\\\input\\{$*}
<       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'matchpairs'* *'mps'*
'matchpairs' 'mps'      string  (default "(:),{:},[:]")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        Characters that form pairs.  The |%| command jumps from one to the
        other.  Currently only single byte character pairs are allowed, and
        they must be different.  The characters must be separated by a colon.
        The pairs must be separated by a comma.  Example for including '<' and
        '>' (HTML): >
                :set mps+=<:>

<       A more exotic example, to jump between the '=' and ';' in an
        assignment, useful for languages like C and Java: >
                :au FileType c,cpp,java set mps+==:;

<       For a more advanced way of using "%", see the matchit.vim plugin in
        the $VIMRUNTIME/macros directory. |add-local-help|

                                                *'matchtime'* *'mat'*
'matchtime' 'mat'       number  (default 5)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}{in Nvi}
        Tenths of a second to show the matching paren, when 'showmatch' is
        set.  Note that this is not in milliseconds, like other options that
        set a time.  This is to be compatible with Nvi.

                                                *'maxcombine'* *'mco'*
'maxcombine' 'mco'      number (default 2)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
                        feature}
        The maximum number of combining characters supported for displaying.
        Only used when 'encoding' is "utf-8".
        The default is OK for most languages.  Hebrew may require 4.
        Maximum value is 6.
        Even when this option is set to 2 you can still edit text with more
        combining characters, you just can't see them.  Use |g8| or |ga|.
        See |mbyte-combining|.

                                                *'maxfuncdepth'* *'mfd'*
'maxfuncdepth' 'mfd'    number  (default 100)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+eval|
                        feature}
        Maximum depth of function calls for user functions.  This normally
        catches endless recursion.  When using a recursive function with
        more depth, set 'maxfuncdepth' to a bigger number.  But this will use
        more memory, there is the danger of failing when memory is exhausted.
        See also |:function|.

                                                *'maxmapdepth'* *'mmd'* *E223*
'maxmapdepth' 'mmd'     number  (default 1000)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Maximum number of times a mapping is done without resulting in a
        character to be used.  This normally catches endless mappings, like
        ":map x y" with ":map y x".  It still does not catch ":map g wg",
        because the 'w' is used before the next mapping is done.  See also
        |key-mapping|.

                                                *'maxmem'* *'mm'*
'maxmem' 'mm'           number  (default between 256 to 5120 (system
                                 dependent) or half the amount of memory
                                 available)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for one buffer.  When this
        limit is reached allocating extra memory for a buffer will cause
        other memory to be freed.  The maximum usable value is about 2000000.
        Use this to work without a limit.  Also see 'maxmemtot'.

                                                *'maxmempattern'* *'mmp'*
'maxmempattern' 'mmp'   number  (default 1000)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Maximum amount of memory (in Kbyte) to use for pattern matching.
        The maximum value is about 2000000.  Use this to work without a limit.
                                                        *E363*
        When Vim runs into the limit it gives an error message and mostly
        behaves like CTRL-C was typed.
        Running into the limit often means that the pattern is very
        inefficient or too complex.  This may already happen with the pattern
        "\(.\)*" on a very long line.  ".*" works much better.
        Vim may run out of memory before hitting the 'maxmempattern' limit.

                                                *'maxmemtot'* *'mmt'*
'maxmemtot' 'mmt'       number  (default between 2048 and 10240 (system
                                 dependent) or half the amount of memory
                                 available)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Maximum amount of memory in Kbyte to use for all buffers together.
        The maximum usable value is about 2000000 (2 Gbyte).  Use this to work
        without a limit.  On 64 bit machines higher values might work.  But
        hey, do you really need more than 2 Gbyte for text editing?
        Also see 'maxmem'.

                                                *'menuitems'* *'mis'*
'menuitems' 'mis'       number  (default 25)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+menu|
                        feature}
        Maximum number of items to use in a menu.  Used for menus that are
        generated from a list of items, e.g., the Buffers menu.  Changing this
        option has no direct effect, the menu must be refreshed first.

                                                *'mkspellmem'* *'msm'*
'mkspellmem' 'msm'      string  (default "460000,2000,500")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
                        feature}
        Parameters for |:mkspell|.  This tunes when to start compressing the
        word tree.  Compression can be slow when there are many words, but
        it's needed to avoid running out of memory.  The amount of memory used
        per word depends very much on how similar the words are, that's why
        this tuning is complicated.

        There are three numbers, separated by commas:
                {start},{inc},{added}

        For most languages the uncompressed word tree fits in memory.  {start}
        gives the amount of memory in Kbyte that can be used before any
        compression is done.  It should be a bit smaller than the amount of
        memory that is available to Vim.

        When going over the {start} limit the {inc} number specifies the
        amount of memory in Kbyte that can be allocated before another
        compression is done.  A low number means compression is done after
        less words are added, which is slow.  A high number means more memory
        will be allocated.

        After doing compression, {added} times 1024 words can be added before
        the {inc} limit is ignored and compression is done when any extra
        amount of memory is needed.  A low number means there is a smaller
        chance of hitting the {inc} limit, less memory is used but it's
        slower.

        The languages for which these numbers are important are Italian and
        Hungarian.  The default works for when you have about 512 Mbyte.  If
        you have 1 Gbyte you could use: >
                :set mkspellmem=900000,3000,800
<       If you have less than 512 Mbyte |:mkspell| may fail for some
        languages, no matter what you set 'mkspellmem' to.

                                   *'modeline'* *'ml'* *'nomodeline'* *'noml'*
'modeline' 'ml'         boolean (Vim default: on (off for root),
                                 Vi default: off)
                        local to buffer
                                                *'modelines'* *'mls'*
'modelines' 'mls'       number  (default 5)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        If 'modeline' is on 'modelines' gives the number of lines that is
        checked for set commands.  If 'modeline' is off or 'modelines' is zero
        no lines are checked.  See |modeline|.
        NOTE: 'modeline' is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                *'modifiable'* *'ma'* *'nomodifiable'* *'noma'*
'modifiable' 'ma'       boolean (default on)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}             *E21*
        When off the buffer contents cannot be changed.  The 'fileformat' and
        'fileencoding' options also can't be changed.
        Can be reset with the |-M| command line argument.

                                *'modified'* *'mod'* *'nomodified'* *'nomod'*
'modified' 'mod'        boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        When on, the buffer is considered to be modified.  This option is set
        when:
        1. A change was made to the text since it was last written.  Using the
           |undo| command to go back to the original text will reset the
           option.  But undoing changes that were made before writing the
           buffer will set the option again, since the text is different from
           when it was written.
        2. 'fileformat' or 'fileencoding' is different from its original
           value.  The original value is set when the buffer is read or
           written.  A ":set nomodified" command also resets the original
           values to the current values and the 'modified' option will be
           reset.
        This option is not set when a change is made to the buffer as the
        result of a BufNewFile, BufRead/BufReadPost, BufWritePost,
        FileAppendPost or VimLeave autocommand event.  See |gzip-example| for
        an explanation.
        When 'buftype' is "nowrite" or "nofile" this option may be set, but
        will be ignored.

                                                *'more'* *'nomore'*
'more'                  boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When on, listings pause when the whole screen is filled.  You will get
        the |more-prompt|.  When this option is off there are no pauses, the
        listing continues until finished.
        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                                *'mouse'* *E538*
'mouse'                 string  (default "", "a" for GUI, MS-DOS and Win32)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Enable the use of the mouse.  Only works for certain terminals
        (xterm, MS-DOS, Win32 |win32-mouse|, QNX pterm, *BSD console with
        sysmouse and Linux console with gpm).  For using the mouse in the
        GUI, see |gui-mouse|.
        The mouse can be enabled for different modes:
                n       Normal mode
                v       Visual mode
                i       Insert mode
                c       Command-line mode
                h       all previous modes when editing a help file
                a       all previous modes
                r       for |hit-enter| and |more-prompt| prompt
        Normally you would enable the mouse in all four modes with: >
                :set mouse=a
<       When the mouse is not enabled, the GUI will still use the mouse for
        modeless selection.  This doesn't move the text cursor.

        See |mouse-using|.  Also see |'clipboard'|.

        Note: When enabling the mouse in a terminal, copy/paste will use the
        "* register if there is access to an X-server.  The xterm handling of
        the mouse buttons can still be used by keeping the shift key pressed.
        Also see the 'clipboard' option.

                        *'mousefocus'* *'mousef'* *'nomousefocus'* *'nomousef'*
'mousefocus' 'mousef'   boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only works in the GUI}
        The window that the mouse pointer is on is automatically activated.
        When changing the window layout or window focus in another way, the
        mouse pointer is moved to the window with keyboard focus.  Off is the
        default because it makes using the pull down menus a little goofy, as
        a pointer transit may activate a window unintentionally.

                        *'mousehide'* *'mh'* *'nomousehide'* *'nomh'*
'mousehide' 'mh'        boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only works in the GUI}
        When on, the mouse pointer is hidden when characters are typed.
        The mouse pointer is restored when the mouse is moved.

                                                *'mousemodel'* *'mousem'*
'mousemodel' 'mousem'   string  (default "extend", "popup" for MS-DOS and Win32)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Sets the model to use for the mouse.  The name mostly specifies what
        the right mouse button is used for:
           extend       Right mouse button extends a selection.  This works
                        like in an xterm.
           popup        Right mouse button pops up a menu.  The shifted left
                        mouse button extends a selection.  This works like
                        with Microsoft Windows.
           popup_setpos Like "popup", but the cursor will be moved to the
                        position where the mouse was clicked, and thus the
                        selected operation will act upon the clicked object.
                        If clicking inside a selection, that selection will
                        be acted upon, i.e. no cursor move.  This implies of
                        course, that right clicking outside a selection will
                        end Visual mode.
        Overview of what button does what for each model:
        mouse               extend              popup(_setpos) ~
        left click          place cursor        place cursor
        left drag           start selection     start selection
        shift-left          search word         extend selection
        right click         extend selection    popup menu (place cursor)
        right drag          extend selection    -
        middle click        paste               paste

        In the "popup" model the right mouse button produces a pop-up menu.
        You need to define this first, see |popup-menu|.

        Note that you can further refine the meaning of buttons with mappings.
        See |gui-mouse-mapping|.  But mappings are NOT used for modeless
        selection (because that's handled in the GUI code directly).

        The 'mousemodel' option is set by the |:behave| command.

                                        *'mouseshape'* *'mouses'* *E547*
'mouseshape' 'mouses'   string  (default "i:beam,r:beam,s:updown,sd:cross,
                                        m:no,ml:up-arrow,v:rightup-arrow")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+mouseshape|
                        feature}
        This option tells Vim what the mouse pointer should look like in
        different modes.  The option is a comma separated list of parts, much
        like used for 'guicursor'.  Each part consist of a mode/location-list
        and an argument-list:
                mode-list:shape,mode-list:shape,..
        The mode-list is a dash separated list of these modes/locations:
                        In a normal window: ~
                n       Normal mode
                v       Visual mode
                ve      Visual mode with 'selection' "exclusive" (same as 'v',
                        if not specified)
                o       Operator-pending mode
                i       Insert mode
                r       Replace mode

                        Others: ~
                c       appending to the command-line
                ci      inserting in the command-line
                cr      replacing in the command-line
                m       at the 'Hit ENTER' or 'More' prompts
                ml      idem, but cursor in the last line
                e       any mode, pointer below last window
                s       any mode, pointer on a status line
                sd      any mode, while dragging a status line
                vs      any mode, pointer on a vertical separator line
                vd      any mode, while dragging a vertical separator line
                a       everywhere

        The shape is one of the following:
        avail   name            looks like ~
        w x     arrow           Normal mouse pointer
        w x     blank           no pointer at all (use with care!)
        w x     beam            I-beam
        w x     updown          up-down sizing arrows
        w x     leftright       left-right sizing arrows
        w x     busy            The system's usual busy pointer
        w x     no              The system's usual 'no input' pointer
          x     udsizing        indicates up-down resizing
          x     lrsizing        indicates left-right resizing
          x     crosshair       like a big thin +
          x     hand1           black hand
          x     hand2           white hand
          x     pencil          what you write with
          x     question        big ?
          x     rightup-arrow   arrow pointing right-up
        w x     up-arrow        arrow pointing up
          x     <number>        any X11 pointer number (see X11/cursorfont.h)

        The "avail" column contains a 'w' if the shape is available for Win32,
        x for X11.
        Any modes not specified or shapes not available use the normal mouse
        pointer.

        Example: >
                :set mouseshape=s:udsizing,m:no
<       will make the mouse turn to a sizing arrow over the status lines and
        indicate no input when the hit-enter prompt is displayed (since
        clicking the mouse has no effect in this state.)

                                                *'mousetime'* *'mouset'*
'mousetime' 'mouset'    number  (default 500)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Only for GUI, MS-DOS, Win32 and Unix with xterm.  Defines the maximum
        time in msec between two mouse clicks for the second click to be
        recognized as a multi click.

                                                    *'mzquantum'* *'mzq'*
'mzquantum' 'mzq'       number  (default 100)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+mzscheme|
                        feature}
        The number of milliseconds between polls for MzScheme threads.
        Negative or zero value means no thread scheduling.

                                                        *'nrformats'* *'nf'*
'nrformats' 'nf'        string  (default "octal,hex")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        This defines what bases Vim will consider for numbers when using the
        CTRL-A and CTRL-X commands for adding to and subtracting from a number
        respectively; see |CTRL-A| for more info on these commands.
        alpha   If included, single alphabetical characters will be
                incremented or decremented.  This is useful for a list with a
                letter index a), b), etc.                       *octal-number*
        octal   If included, numbers that start with a zero will be considered
                to be octal.  Example: Using CTRL-A on "007" results in "010".
        hex     If included, numbers starting with "0x" or "0X" will be
                considered to be hexadecimal.  Example: Using CTRL-X on
                "0x100" results in "0x0ff".
        Numbers which simply begin with a digit in the range 1-9 are always
        considered decimal.  This also happens for numbers that are not
        recognized as octal or hex.

                                *'number'* *'nu'* *'nonumber'* *'nonu'*
'number' 'nu'           boolean (default off)
                        local to window
        Print the line number in front of each line.  When the 'n' option is
        excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped line will not use the column of
        line numbers (this is the default when 'compatible' isn't set).
        The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line
        number.
        When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
        characters are put before the number.
        See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
        When setting this option, 'relativenumber' is reset.

                                                *'numberwidth'* *'nuw'*
'numberwidth' 'nuw'     number  (Vim default: 4  Vi default: 8)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+linebreak|
                        feature}
        Minimal number of columns to use for the line number.  Only relevant
        when the 'number' or 'relativenumber' option is set or printing lines
        with a line number. Since one space is always between the number and
        the text, there is one less character for the number itself.
        The value is the minimum width.  A bigger width is used when needed to
        fit the highest line number in the buffer respectively the number of
        rows in the window, depending on whether 'number' or 'relativenumber'
        is set. Thus with the Vim default of 4 there is room for a line number
        up to 999. When the buffer has 1000 lines five columns will be used.
        The minimum value is 1, the maximum value is 10.
        NOTE: 'numberwidth' is reset to 8 when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'omnifunc'* *'ofu'*
'omnifunc' 'ofu'        string  (default: empty)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+eval|
                        or |+insert_expand| features}
        This option specifies a function to be used for Insert mode omni
        completion with CTRL-X CTRL-O. |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-O|
        See |complete-functions| for an explanation of how the function is
        invoked and what it should return.
        This option is usually set by a filetype plugin:
        |:filetype-plugin-on|


                            *'opendevice'* *'odev'* *'noopendevice'* *'noodev'*
'opendevice' 'odev'     boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only for MS-DOS, MS-Windows and OS/2}
        Enable reading and writing from devices.  This may get Vim stuck on a
        device that can be opened but doesn't actually do the I/O.  Therefore
        it is off by default.
        Note that on MS-Windows editing "aux.h", "lpt1.txt" and the like also
        result in editing a device.


                                                *'operatorfunc'* *'opfunc'*
'operatorfunc' 'opfunc' string  (default: empty)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        This option specifies a function to be called by the |g@| operator.
        See |:map-operator| for more info and an example.

        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.


                                        *'osfiletype'* *'oft'*
'osfiletype' 'oft'      string (default: "")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        This option was supported on RISC OS, which has been removed.


                                                *'paragraphs'* *'para'*
'paragraphs' 'para'     string  (default "IPLPPPQPP TPHPLIPpLpItpplpipbp")
                        global
        Specifies the nroff macros that separate paragraphs.  These are pairs
        of two letters (see |object-motions|).

                                                *'paste'* *'nopaste'*
'paste'                 boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Put Vim in Paste mode.  This is useful if you want to cut or copy
        some text from one window and paste it in Vim.  This will avoid
        unexpected effects.
        Setting this option is useful when using Vim in a terminal, where Vim
        cannot distinguish between typed text and pasted text.  In the GUI, Vim
        knows about pasting and will mostly do the right thing without 'paste'
        being set.  The same is true for a terminal where Vim handles the
        mouse clicks itself.
        This option is reset when starting the GUI.  Thus if you set it in
        your .vimrc it will work in a terminal, but not in the GUI.  Setting
        'paste' in the GUI has side effects: e.g., the Paste toolbar button
        will no longer work in Insert mode, because it uses a mapping.
        When the 'paste' option is switched on (also when it was already on):
                - mapping in Insert mode and Command-line mode is disabled
                - abbreviations are disabled
                - 'textwidth' is set to 0
                - 'wrapmargin' is set to 0
                - 'autoindent' is reset
                - 'smartindent' is reset
                - 'softtabstop' is set to 0
                - 'revins' is reset
                - 'ruler' is reset
                - 'showmatch' is reset
                - 'formatoptions' is used like it is empty
        These options keep their value, but their effect is disabled:
                - 'lisp'
                - 'indentexpr'
                - 'cindent'
        NOTE: When you start editing another file while the 'paste' option is
        on, settings from the modelines or autocommands may change the
        settings again, causing trouble when pasting text.  You might want to
        set the 'paste' option again.
        When the 'paste' option is reset the mentioned options are restored to
        the value before the moment 'paste' was switched from off to on.
        Resetting 'paste' before ever setting it does not have any effect.
        Since mapping doesn't work while 'paste' is active, you need to use
        the 'pastetoggle' option to toggle the 'paste' option with some key.

                                                *'pastetoggle'* *'pt'*
'pastetoggle' 'pt'      string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When non-empty, specifies the key sequence that toggles the 'paste'
        option.  This is like specifying a mapping: >
            :map {keys} :set invpaste<CR>
<       Where {keys} is the value of 'pastetoggle'.
        The difference is that it will work even when 'paste' is set.
        'pastetoggle' works in Insert mode and Normal mode, but not in
        Command-line mode.
        Mappings are checked first, thus overrule 'pastetoggle'.  However,
        when 'paste' is on mappings are ignored in Insert mode, thus you can do
        this: >
            :map <F10> :set paste<CR>
            :map <F11> :set nopaste<CR>
            :imap <F10> <C-O>:set paste<CR>
            :imap <F11> <nop>
            :set pastetoggle=<F11>
<       This will make <F10> start paste mode and <F11> stop paste mode.
        Note that typing <F10> in paste mode inserts "<F10>", since in paste
        mode everything is inserted literally, except the 'pastetoggle' key
        sequence.
        When the value has several bytes 'ttimeoutlen' applies.

                                                *'pex'* *'patchexpr'*
'patchexpr' 'pex'       string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+diff|
                        feature}
        Expression which is evaluated to apply a patch to a file and generate
        the resulting new version of the file.  See |diff-patchexpr|.

                                                *'patchmode'* *'pm'* *E206*
'patchmode' 'pm'        string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When non-empty the oldest version of a file is kept.  This can be used
        to keep the original version of a file if you are changing files in a
        source distribution.  Only the first time that a file is written a
        copy of the original file will be kept.  The name of the copy is the
        name of the original file with the string in the 'patchmode' option
        appended.  This option should start with a dot.  Use a string like
        ".org".  'backupdir' must not be empty for this to work (Detail: The
        backup file is renamed to the patchmode file after the new file has
        been successfully written, that's why it must be possible to write a
        backup file).  If there was no file to be backed up, an empty file is
        created.
        When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a patchmode file is not made.
        Using 'patchmode' for compressed files appends the extension at the
        end (e.g., "file.gz.orig"), thus the resulting name isn't always
        recognized as a compressed file.
        Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

                                *'path'* *'pa'* *E343* *E345* *E347* *E854*
'path' 'pa'             string  (default on Unix: ".,/usr/include,,"
                                   on OS/2:       ".,/emx/include,,"
                                   other systems: ".,,")
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
        This is a list of directories which will be searched when using the
        |gf|, [f, ]f, ^Wf, |:find|, |:sfind|, |:tabfind| and other commands,
        provided that the file being searched for has a relative path (not
        starting with "/", "./" or "../").  The directories in the 'path'
        option may be relative or absolute.
        - Use commas to separate directory names: >
                :set path=.,/usr/local/include,/usr/include
<       - Spaces can also be used to separate directory names (for backwards
          compatibility with version 3.0).  To have a space in a directory
          name, precede it with an extra backslash, and escape the space: >
                :set path=.,/dir/with\\\ space
<       - To include a comma in a directory name precede it with an extra
          backslash: >
                :set path=.,/dir/with\\,comma
<       - To search relative to the directory of the current file, use: >
                :set path=.
<       - To search in the current directory use an empty string between two
          commas: >
                :set path=,,
<       - A directory name may end in a ':' or '/'.
        - Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        - When using |netrw.vim| URLs can be used.  For example, adding
          "http://www.vim.org" will make ":find index.html" work.
        - Search upwards and downwards in a directory tree using "*", "**" and
          ";".  See |file-searching| for info and syntax.
          {not available when compiled without the |+path_extra| feature}
        - Careful with '\' characters, type two to get one in the option: >
                :set path=.,c:\\include
<         Or just use '/' instead: >
                :set path=.,c:/include
<       Don't forget "." or files won't even be found in the same directory as
        the file!
        The maximum length is limited.  How much depends on the system, mostly
        it is something like 256 or 1024 characters.
        You can check if all the include files are found, using the value of
        'path', see |:checkpath|.
        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.  To remove the current directory use: >
                :set path-=
<       To add the current directory use: >
                :set path+=
<       To use an environment variable, you probably need to replace the
        separator.  Here is an example to append $INCL, in which directory
        names are separated with a semi-colon: >
                :let &path = &path . "," . substitute($INCL, ';', ',', 'g')
<       Replace the ';' with a ':' or whatever separator is used.  Note that
        this doesn't work when $INCL contains a comma or white space.

                        *'preserveindent'* *'pi'* *'nopreserveindent'* *'nopi'*
'preserveindent' 'pi'   boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        When changing the indent of the current line, preserve as much of the
        indent structure as possible.  Normally the indent is replaced by a
        series of tabs followed by spaces as required (unless |'expandtab'| is
        enabled, in which case only spaces are used).  Enabling this option
        means the indent will preserve as many existing characters as possible
        for indenting, and only add additional tabs or spaces as required.
        'expandtab' does not apply to the preserved white space, a Tab remains
        a Tab.
        NOTE: When using ">>" multiple times the resulting indent is a mix of
        tabs and spaces.  You might not like this.
        NOTE: 'preserveindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.
        Also see 'copyindent'.
        Use |:retab| to clean up white space.

                                        *'previewheight'* *'pvh'*
'previewheight' 'pvh'   number (default 12)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
                        |+quickfix| features}
        Default height for a preview window.  Used for |:ptag| and associated
        commands.  Used for |CTRL-W_}| when no count is given.

                                        *'previewwindow'* *'nopreviewwindow'*
                                        *'pvw'* *'nopvw'* *E590*
'previewwindow' 'pvw'   boolean (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+windows| or
                        |+quickfix| features}
        Identifies the preview window.  Only one window can have this option
        set.  It's normally not set directly, but by using one of the commands
        |:ptag|, |:pedit|, etc.

                                                *'printdevice'* *'pdev'*
'printdevice' 'pdev'    string  (default empty)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
                        feature}
        The name of the printer to be used for |:hardcopy|.
        See |pdev-option|.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'printencoding'* *'penc'*
'printencoding' 'penc'  String  (default empty, except for some systems)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
                        and |+postscript| features}
        Sets the character encoding used when printing.
        See |penc-option|.

                                                *'printexpr'* *'pexpr'*
'printexpr' 'pexpr'     String  (default: see below)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
                        and |+postscript| features}
        Expression used to print the PostScript produced with |:hardcopy|.
        See |pexpr-option|.

                                                *'printfont'* *'pfn'*
'printfont' 'pfn'       string  (default "courier")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
                        feature}
        The name of the font that will be used for |:hardcopy|.
        See |pfn-option|.

                                                *'printheader'* *'pheader'*
'printheader' 'pheader'  string  (default "%<%f%h%m%=Page %N")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+printer|
                        feature}
        The format of the header produced in |:hardcopy| output.
        See |pheader-option|.

                                                *'printmbcharset'* *'pmbcs'*
'printmbcharset' 'pmbcs'  string (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+printer|,
                        |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features}
        The CJK character set to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|.
        See |pmbcs-option|.

                                                *'printmbfont'* *'pmbfn'*
'printmbfont' 'pmbfn'   string (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+printer|,
                        |+postscript| and |+multi_byte| features}
        List of font names to be used for CJK output from |:hardcopy|.
        See |pmbfn-option|.

                                                *'printoptions'* *'popt'*
'printoptions' 'popt' string (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with |+printer| feature}
        List of items that control the format of the output of |:hardcopy|.
        See |popt-option|.

                                                *'prompt'* *'noprompt'*
'prompt'                boolean (default on)
                        global
        When on a ":" prompt is used in Ex mode.

                                                *'pumheight'* *'ph'*
'pumheight' 'ph'        number  (default 0)
                        global
                        {not available when compiled without the
                        |+insert_expand| feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        Determines the maximum number of items to show in the popup menu for
        Insert mode completion.  When zero as much space as available is used.
        |ins-completion-menu|.


                                                *'quoteescape'* *'qe'*
'quoteescape' 'qe'      string  (default "\")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        The characters that are used to escape quotes in a string.  Used for
        objects like a', a" and a` |a'|.
        When one of the characters in this option is found inside a string,
        the following character will be skipped.  The default value makes the
        text "foo\"bar\\" considered to be one string.

                                   *'readonly'* *'ro'* *'noreadonly'* *'noro'*
'readonly' 'ro'         boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
        If on, writes fail unless you use a '!'.  Protects you from
        accidentally overwriting a file.  Default on when Vim is started
        in read-only mode ("vim -R") or when the executable is called "view".
        When using ":w!" the 'readonly' option is reset for the current
        buffer, unless the 'Z' flag is in 'cpoptions'.
        {not in Vi:}  When using the ":view" command the 'readonly' option is
        set for the newly edited buffer.

                                                *'redrawtime'* *'rdt'*
'redrawtime' 'rdt'      number  (default 2000)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+reltime|
                        feature}
        The time in milliseconds for redrawing the display.  This applies to
        searching for patterns for 'hlsearch' and |:match| highlighting.
        When redrawing takes more than this many milliseconds no further
        matches will be highlighted.  This is used to avoid that Vim hangs
        when using a very complicated pattern.

                *'relativenumber'* *'rnu'* *'norelativenumber'* *'nornu'*
'relativenumber' 'rnu'  boolean (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
        Show the line number relative to the line with the cursor in front of
        each line. Relative line numbers help you use the |count| you can
        precede some vertical motion commands (e.g. j k + -) with, without
        having to calculate it yourself. Especially useful in combination with
        other commands (e.g. y d c < > gq gw =).
        When the 'n' option is excluded from 'cpoptions' a wrapped
        line will not use the column of line numbers (this is the default when
        'compatible' isn't set).
        The 'numberwidth' option can be used to set the room used for the line
        number.
        When a long, wrapped line doesn't start with the first character, '-'
        characters are put before the number.
        See |hl-LineNr| for the highlighting used for the number.
        When setting this option, 'number' is reset.

                                                *'remap'* *'noremap'*
'remap'                 boolean (default on)
                        global
        Allows for mappings to work recursively.  If you do not want this for
        a single entry, use the :noremap[!] command.
        NOTE: To avoid portability problems with Vim scripts, always keep
        this option at the default "on".  Only switch it off when working with
        old Vi scripts.

                                                *'report'*
'report'                number  (default 2)
                        global
        Threshold for reporting number of lines changed.  When the number of
        changed lines is more than 'report' a message will be given for most
        ":" commands.  If you want it always, set 'report' to 0.
        For the ":substitute" command the number of substitutions is used
        instead of the number of lines.

                         *'restorescreen'* *'rs'* *'norestorescreen'* *'nors'*
'restorescreen' 'rs'    boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}  {only in Windows 95/NT console version}
        When set, the screen contents is restored when exiting Vim.  This also
        happens when executing external commands.

        For non-Windows Vim: You can set or reset the 't_ti' and 't_te'
        options in your .vimrc.  To disable restoring:
                set t_ti= t_te=
        To enable restoring (for an xterm):
                set t_ti=^[7^[[r^[[?47h t_te=^[[?47l^[8
        (Where ^[ is an <Esc>, type CTRL-V <Esc> to insert it)

                                *'revins'* *'ri'* *'norevins'* *'nori'*
'revins' 'ri'           boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
                        feature}
        Inserting characters in Insert mode will work backwards.  See "typing
        backwards" |ins-reverse|.  This option can be toggled with the CTRL-_
        command in Insert mode, when 'allowrevins' is set.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' or 'paste' is set.

                                 *'rightleft'* *'rl'* *'norightleft'* *'norl'*
'rightleft' 'rl'        boolean (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
                        feature}
        When on, display orientation becomes right-to-left, i.e., characters
        that are stored in the file appear from the right to the left.
        Using this option, it is possible to edit files for languages that
        are written from the right to the left such as Hebrew and Arabic.
        This option is per window, so it is possible to edit mixed files
        simultaneously, or to view the same file in both ways (this is
        useful whenever you have a mixed text file with both right-to-left
        and left-to-right strings so that both sets are displayed properly
        in different windows).  Also see |rileft.txt|.

                        *'rightleftcmd'* *'rlc'*
'rightleftcmd' 'rlc'    string  (default "search")
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+rightleft|
                        feature}
        Each word in this option enables the command line editing to work in
        right-to-left mode for a group of commands:

                search          "/" and "?" commands

        This is useful for languages such as Hebrew, Arabic and Farsi.
        The 'rightleft' option must be set for 'rightleftcmd' to take effect.

                                         *'ruler'* *'ru'* *'noruler'* *'noru'*
'ruler' 'ru'            boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the
                        |+cmdline_info| feature}
        Show the line and column number of the cursor position, separated by a
        comma.  When there is room, the relative position of the displayed
        text in the file is shown on the far right:
                Top     first line is visible
                Bot     last line is visible
                All     first and last line are visible
                45%     relative position in the file
        If 'rulerformat' is set, it will determine the contents of the ruler.
        Each window has its own ruler.  If a window has a status line, the
        ruler is shown there.  Otherwise it is shown in the last line of the
        screen.  If the statusline is given by 'statusline' (i.e. not empty),
        this option takes precedence over 'ruler' and 'rulerformat'
        If the number of characters displayed is different from the number of
        bytes in the text (e.g., for a TAB or a multi-byte character), both
        the text column (byte number) and the screen column are shown,
        separated with a dash.
        For an empty line "0-1" is shown.
        For an empty buffer the line number will also be zero: "0,0-1".
        This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
        If you don't want to see the ruler all the time but want to know where
        you are, use "g CTRL-G" |g_CTRL-G|.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'rulerformat'* *'ruf'*
'rulerformat' 'ruf'     string  (default empty)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
                        feature}
        When this option is not empty, it determines the content of the ruler
        string, as displayed for the 'ruler' option.
        The format of this option is like that of 'statusline'.
        The default ruler width is 17 characters.  To make the ruler 15
        characters wide, put "%15(" at the start and "%)" at the end.
        Example: >
                :set rulerformat=%15(%c%V\ %p%%%)
<
                                *'runtimepath'* *'rtp'* *vimfiles*
'runtimepath' 'rtp'     string  (default:
                                        Unix: "$HOME/.vim,
                                                $VIM/vimfiles,
                                                $VIMRUNTIME,
                                                $VIM/vimfiles/after,
                                                $HOME/.vim/after"
                                        Amiga: "home:vimfiles,
                                                $VIM/vimfiles,
                                                $VIMRUNTIME,
                                                $VIM/vimfiles/after,
                                                home:vimfiles/after"
                                        PC, OS/2: "$HOME/vimfiles,
                                                $VIM/vimfiles,
                                                $VIMRUNTIME,
                                                $VIM/vimfiles/after,
                                                $HOME/vimfiles/after"
                                        Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles,
                                                $VIMRUNTIME,
                                                $VIM:vimfiles:after"
                                        RISC-OS: "Choices:vimfiles,
                                                $VIMRUNTIME,
                                                Choices:vimfiles/after"
                                        VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles,
                                                $VIM/vimfiles,
                                                $VIMRUNTIME,
                                                $VIM/vimfiles/after,
                                                sys$login:vimfiles/after")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        This is a list of directories which will be searched for runtime
        files:
          filetype.vim  filetypes by file name |new-filetype|
          scripts.vim   filetypes by file contents |new-filetype-scripts|
          autoload/     automatically loaded scripts |autoload-functions|
          colors/       color scheme files |:colorscheme|
          compiler/     compiler files |:compiler|
          doc/          documentation |write-local-help|
          ftplugin/     filetype plugins |write-filetype-plugin|
          indent/       indent scripts |indent-expression|
          keymap/       key mapping files |mbyte-keymap|
          lang/         menu translations |:menutrans|
          menu.vim      GUI menus |menu.vim|
          plugin/       plugin scripts |write-plugin|
          print/        files for printing |postscript-print-encoding|
          spell/        spell checking files |spell|
          syntax/       syntax files |mysyntaxfile|
          tutor/        files for vimtutor |tutor|

        And any other file searched for with the |:runtime| command.

        The defaults for most systems are setup to search five locations:
        1. In your home directory, for your personal preferences.
        2. In a system-wide Vim directory, for preferences from the system
           administrator.
        3. In $VIMRUNTIME, for files distributed with Vim.
                                                        *after-directory*
        4. In the "after" directory in the system-wide Vim directory.  This is
           for the system administrator to overrule or add to the distributed
           defaults (rarely needed)
        5. In the "after" directory in your home directory.  This is for
           personal preferences to overrule or add to the distributed defaults
           or system-wide settings (rarely needed).

        Note that, unlike 'path', no wildcards like "**" are allowed.  Normal
        wildcards are allowed, but can significantly slow down searching for
        runtime files.  For speed, use as few items as possible and avoid
        wildcards.
        See |:runtime|.
        Example: >
                :set runtimepath=~/vimruntime,/mygroup/vim,$VIMRUNTIME
<       This will use the directory "~/vimruntime" first (containing your
        personal Vim runtime files), then "/mygroup/vim" (shared between a
        group of people) and finally "$VIMRUNTIME" (the distributed runtime
        files).
        You probably should always include $VIMRUNTIME somewhere, to use the
        distributed runtime files.  You can put a directory before $VIMRUNTIME
        to find files which replace a distributed runtime files.  You can put
        a directory after $VIMRUNTIME to find files which add to distributed
        runtime files.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'scroll'* *'scr'*
'scroll' 'scr'          number  (default: half the window height)
                        local to window
        Number of lines to scroll with CTRL-U and CTRL-D commands.  Will be
        set to half the number of lines in the window when the window size
        changes.  If you give a count to the CTRL-U or CTRL-D command it will
        be used as the new value for 'scroll'.  Reset to half the window
        height with ":set scroll=0".   {Vi is a bit different: 'scroll' gives
        the number of screen lines instead of file lines, makes a difference
        when lines wrap}

                        *'scrollbind'* *'scb'* *'noscrollbind'* *'noscb'*
'scrollbind' 'scb'      boolean  (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
                        feature}
        See also |scroll-binding|.  When this option is set, the current
        window scrolls as other scrollbind windows (windows that also have
        this option set) scroll.  This option is useful for viewing the
        differences between two versions of a file, see 'diff'.
        See |'scrollopt'| for options that determine how this option should be
        interpreted.
        This option is mostly reset when splitting a window to edit another
        file.  This means that ":split | edit file" results in two windows
        with scroll-binding, but ":split file" does not.

                                                *'scrolljump'* *'sj'*
'scrolljump' 'sj'       number  (default 1)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Minimal number of lines to scroll when the cursor gets off the
        screen (e.g., with "j").  Not used for scroll commands (e.g., CTRL-E,
        CTRL-D).  Useful if your terminal scrolls very slowly.
        When set to a negative number from -1 to -100 this is used as the
        percentage of the window height.  Thus -50 scrolls half the window
        height.
        NOTE: This option is set to 1 when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'scrolloff'* *'so'*
'scrolloff' 'so'        number  (default 0)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Minimal number of screen lines to keep above and below the cursor.
        This will make some context visible around where you are working.  If
        you set it to a very large value (999) the cursor line will always be
        in the middle of the window (except at the start or end of the file or
        when long lines wrap).
        For scrolling horizontally see 'sidescrolloff'.
        NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'scrollopt'* *'sbo'*
'scrollopt' 'sbo'       string  (default "ver,jump")
                        global
                        {not available when compiled without the |+scrollbind|
                        feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        This is a comma-separated list of words that specifies how
        'scrollbind' windows should behave.  'sbo' stands for ScrollBind
        Options.
        The following words are available:
            ver         Bind vertical scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
            hor         Bind horizontal scrolling for 'scrollbind' windows
            jump        Applies to the offset between two windows for vertical
                        scrolling.  This offset is the difference in the first
                        displayed line of the bound windows.  When moving
                        around in a window, another 'scrollbind' window may
                        reach a position before the start or after the end of
                        the buffer.  The offset is not changed though, when
                        moving back the 'scrollbind' window will try to scroll
                        to the desired position when possible.
                        When now making that window the current one, two
                        things can be done with the relative offset:
                        1. When "jump" is not included, the relative offset is
                           adjusted for the scroll position in the new current
                           window.  When going back to the other window, the
                           new relative offset will be used.
                        2. When "jump" is included, the other windows are
                           scrolled to keep the same relative offset.  When
                           going back to the other window, it still uses the
                           same relative offset.
        Also see |scroll-binding|.
        When 'diff' mode is active there always is vertical scroll binding,
        even when "ver" isn't there.

                                                *'sections'* *'sect'*
'sections' 'sect'       string  (default "SHNHH HUnhsh")
                        global
        Specifies the nroff macros that separate sections.  These are pairs of
        two letters (See |object-motions|).  The default makes a section start
        at the nroff macros ".SH", ".NH", ".H", ".HU", ".nh" and ".sh".

                                                *'secure'* *'nosecure'* *E523*
'secure'                boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When on, ":autocmd", shell and write commands are not allowed in
        ".vimrc" and ".exrc" in the current directory and map commands are
        displayed.  Switch it off only if you know that you will not run into
        problems, or when the 'exrc' option is off.  On Unix this option is
        only used if the ".vimrc" or ".exrc" is not owned by you.  This can be
        dangerous if the systems allows users to do a "chown".  You better set
        'secure' at the end of your ~/.vimrc then.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'selection'* *'sel'*
'selection' 'sel'       string  (default "inclusive")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        This option defines the behavior of the selection.  It is only used
        in Visual and Select mode.
        Possible values:
           value        past line     inclusive ~
           old             no           yes
           inclusive       yes          yes
           exclusive       yes          no
        "past line" means that the cursor is allowed to be positioned one
        character past the line.
        "inclusive" means that the last character of the selection is included
        in an operation.  For example, when "x" is used to delete the
        selection.
        Note that when "exclusive" is used and selecting from the end
        backwards, you cannot include the last character of a line, when
        starting in Normal mode and 'virtualedit' empty.

        The 'selection' option is set by the |:behave| command.

                                                *'selectmode'* *'slm'*
'selectmode' 'slm'      string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        This is a comma separated list of words, which specifies when to start
        Select mode instead of Visual mode, when a selection is started.
        Possible values:
           mouse        when using the mouse
           key          when using shifted special keys
           cmd          when using "v", "V" or CTRL-V
        See |Select-mode|.
        The 'selectmode' option is set by the |:behave| command.

                                                *'sessionoptions'* *'ssop'*
'sessionoptions' 'ssop' string  (default: "blank,buffers,curdir,folds,
                                               help,options,tabpages,winsize")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+mksession|
                        feature}
        Changes the effect of the |:mksession| command.  It is a comma
        separated list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring
        something:
           word         save and restore ~
           blank        empty windows
           buffers      hidden and unloaded buffers, not just those in windows
           curdir       the current directory
           folds        manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
                        fold options
           globals      global variables that start with an uppercase letter
                        and contain at least one lowercase letter.  Only
                        String and Number types are stored.
           help         the help window
           localoptions options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
                        global values for local options)
           options      all options and mappings (also global values for local
                        options)
           resize       size of the Vim window: 'lines' and 'columns'
           sesdir       the directory in which the session file is located
                        will become the current directory (useful with
                        projects accessed over a network from different
                        systems)
           slash        backslashes in file names replaced with forward
                        slashes
           tabpages     all tab pages; without this only the current tab page
                        is restored, so that you can make a session for each
                        tab page separately
           unix         with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
                        on Windows or DOS
           winpos       position of the whole Vim window
           winsize      window sizes

        Don't include both "curdir" and "sesdir".
        When neither "curdir" nor "sesdir" is included, file names are stored
        with absolute paths.
        "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing session files
        with Unix.  The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
        but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.

                                                *'shell'* *'sh'* *E91*
'shell' 'sh'            string  (default $SHELL or "sh",
                                        MS-DOS and Win32: "command.com" or
                                        "cmd.exe", OS/2: "cmd")
                        global
        Name of the shell to use for ! and :! commands.  When changing the
        value also check these options: 'shelltype', 'shellpipe', 'shellslash'
        'shellredir', 'shellquote', 'shellxquote' and 'shellcmdflag'.
        It is allowed to give an argument to the command, e.g.  "csh -f".
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
        Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        If the name of the shell contains a space, you might need to enclose
        it in quotes.  Example: >
                :set shell=\"c:\program\ files\unix\sh.exe\"\ -f
<       Note the backslash before each quote (to avoid starting a comment) and
        each space (to avoid ending the option value).  Also note that the
        "-f" is not inside the quotes, because it is not part of the command
        name.  And Vim automagically recognizes the backslashes that are path
        separators.
        For Dos 32 bits (DJGPP), you can set the $DJSYSFLAGS environment
        variable to change the way external commands are executed.  See the
        libc.inf file of DJGPP.
        Under MS-Windows, when the executable ends in ".com" it must be
        included.  Thus setting the shell to "command.com" or "4dos.com"
        works, but "command" and "4dos" do not work for all commands (e.g.,
        filtering).
        For unknown reasons, when using "4dos.com" the current directory is
        changed to "C:\".  To avoid this set 'shell' like this: >
                :set shell=command.com\ /c\ 4dos
<       This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'shellcmdflag'* *'shcf'*
'shellcmdflag' 'shcf'   string  (default: "-c", MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
                                        does not contain "sh" somewhere: "/c")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Flag passed to the shell to execute "!" and ":!" commands; e.g.,
        "bash.exe -c ls" or "command.com /c dir".  For the MS-DOS-like
        systems, the default is set according to the value of 'shell', to
        reduce the need to set this option by the user.  It's not used for
        OS/2 (EMX figures this out itself).
        On Unix it can have more than one flag.  Each white space separated
        part is passed as an argument to the shell command.
        See |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes.
        Also see |dos-shell| for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'shellpipe'* *'sp'*
'shellpipe' 'sp'        string  (default ">", "| tee", "|& tee" or "2>&1| tee")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+quickfix|
                        feature}
        String to be used to put the output of the ":make" command in the
        error file.  See also |:make_makeprg|.  See |option-backslash| about
        including spaces and backslashes.
        The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
        (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
        of this option).
        For the Amiga and MS-DOS the default is ">".  The output is directly
        saved in a file and not echoed to the screen.
        For Unix the default it "| tee".  The stdout of the compiler is saved
        in a file and echoed to the screen.  If the 'shell' option is "csh" or
        "tcsh" after initializations, the default becomes "|& tee".  If the
        'shell' option is "sh", "ksh", "mksh", "pdksh", "zsh" or "bash" the
        default becomes "2>&1| tee".  This means that stderr is also included.
        Before using the 'shell' option a path is removed, thus "/bin/sh" uses
        "sh".
        The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
        and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
        there, the 'shellpipe' option changes automatically, unless it was
        explicitly set before.
        When 'shellpipe' is set to an empty string, no redirection of the
        ":make" output will be done.  This is useful if you use a 'makeprg'
        that writes to 'makeef' by itself.  If you want no piping, but do
        want to include the 'makeef', set 'shellpipe' to a single space.
        Don't forget to precede the space with a backslash: ":set sp=\ ".
        In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
        become obsolete (at least for Unix).
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'shellquote'* *'shq'*
'shellquote' 'shq'      string  (default: ""; MS-DOS and Win32, when 'shell'
                                        contains "sh" somewhere: "\"")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
        the "!" and ":!" commands.  The redirection is kept outside of the
        quoting.  See 'shellxquote' to include the redirection.  It's
        probably not useful to set both options.
        This is an empty string by default.  Only known to be useful for
        third-party shells on MS-DOS-like systems, such as the MKS Korn Shell
        or bash, where it should be "\"".  The default is adjusted according
        the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option by the
        user.  See |dos-shell|.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'shellredir'* *'srr'*
'shellredir' 'srr'      string  (default ">", ">&" or ">%s 2>&1")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        String to be used to put the output of a filter command in a temporary
        file.  See also |:!|.  See |option-backslash| about including spaces
        and backslashes.
        The name of the temporary file can be represented by "%s" if necessary
        (the file name is appended automatically if no %s appears in the value
        of this option).
        The default is ">".  For Unix, if the 'shell' option is "csh", "tcsh"
        or "zsh" during initializations, the default becomes ">&".  If the
        'shell' option is "sh", "ksh" or "bash" the default becomes
        ">%s 2>&1".  This means that stderr is also included.
        For Win32, the Unix checks are done and additionally "cmd" is checked
        for, which makes the default ">%s 2>&1".  Also, the same names with
        ".exe" appended are checked for.
        The initialization of this option is done after reading the ".vimrc"
        and the other initializations, so that when the 'shell' option is set
        there, the 'shellredir' option changes automatically unless it was
        explicitly set before.
        In the future pipes may be used for filtering and this option will
        become obsolete (at least for Unix).
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                        *'shellslash'* *'ssl'* *'noshellslash'* *'nossl'*
'shellslash' 'ssl'      boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi} {only for MSDOS, MS-Windows and OS/2}
        When set, a forward slash is used when expanding file names.  This is
        useful when a Unix-like shell is used instead of command.com or
        cmd.exe.  Backward slashes can still be typed, but they are changed to
        forward slashes by Vim.
        Note that setting or resetting this option has no effect for some
        existing file names, thus this option needs to be set before opening
        any file for best results.  This might change in the future.
        'shellslash' only works when a backslash can be used as a path
        separator.  To test if this is so use: >
                if exists('+shellslash')
<
                        *'shelltemp'* *'stmp'* *'noshelltemp'* *'nostmp'*
'shelltemp' 'stmp'      boolean (Vi default off, Vim default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When on, use temp files for shell commands.  When off use a pipe.
        When using a pipe is not possible temp files are used anyway.
        Currently a pipe is only supported on Unix and MS-Windows 2K and
        later.  You can check it with: >
                :if has("filterpipe")
<       The advantage of using a pipe is that nobody can read the temp file
        and the 'shell' command does not need to support redirection.
        The advantage of using a temp file is that the file type and encoding
        can be detected.
        The |FilterReadPre|, |FilterReadPost| and |FilterWritePre|,
        |FilterWritePost| autocommands event are not triggered when
        'shelltemp' is off.

                                                *'shelltype'* *'st'*
'shelltype' 'st'        number  (default 0)
                        global
                        {not in Vi} {only for the Amiga}
        On the Amiga this option influences the way how the commands work
        which use a shell.
        0 and 1: always use the shell
        2 and 3: use the shell only to filter lines
        4 and 5: use shell only for ':sh' command
        When not using the shell, the command is executed directly.

        0 and 2: use "shell 'shellcmdflag' cmd" to start external commands
        1 and 3: use "shell cmd" to start external commands

                                                *'shellxquote'* *'sxq'*
'shellxquote' 'sxq'     string  (default: "";
                                        for Win32, when 'shell' contains "sh"
                                        somewhere: "\""
                                        for Unix, when using system(): "\"")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Quoting character(s), put around the command passed to the shell, for
        the "!" and ":!" commands.  Includes the redirection.  See
        'shellquote' to exclude the redirection.  It's probably not useful
        to set both options.
        This is an empty string by default.  Known to be useful for
        third-party shells when using the Win32 version, such as the MKS Korn
        Shell or bash, where it should be "\"".  The default is adjusted
        according the value of 'shell', to reduce the need to set this option
        by the user.  See |dos-shell|.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                        *'shiftround'* *'sr'* *'noshiftround'* *'nosr'*
'shiftround' 'sr'       boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Round indent to multiple of 'shiftwidth'.  Applies to > and <
        commands.  CTRL-T and CTRL-D in Insert mode always round the indent to
        a multiple of 'shiftwidth' (this is Vi compatible).
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'shiftwidth'* *'sw'*
'shiftwidth' 'sw'       number  (default 8)
                        local to buffer
        Number of spaces to use for each step of (auto)indent.  Used for
        |'cindent'|, |>>|, |<<|, etc.

                                                *'shortmess'* *'shm'*
'shortmess' 'shm'       string  (Vim default "filnxtToO", Vi default: "",
                                                        POSIX default: "A")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        This option helps to avoid all the |hit-enter| prompts caused by file
        messages, for example  with CTRL-G, and to avoid some other messages.
        It is a list of flags:
         flag   meaning when present    ~
          f     use "(3 of 5)" instead of "(file 3 of 5)"
          i     use "[noeol]" instead of "[Incomplete last line]"
          l     use "999L, 888C" instead of "999 lines, 888 characters"
          m     use "[+]" instead of "[Modified]"
          n     use "[New]" instead of "[New File]"
          r     use "[RO]" instead of "[readonly]"
          w     use "[w]" instead of "written" for file write message
                and "[a]" instead of "appended" for ':w >> file' command
          x     use "[dos]" instead of "[dos format]", "[unix]" instead of
                "[unix format]" and "[mac]" instead of "[mac format]".
          a     all of the above abbreviations

          o     overwrite message for writing a file with subsequent message
                for reading a file (useful for ":wn" or when 'autowrite' on)
          O     message for reading a file overwrites any previous message.
                Also for quickfix message (e.g., ":cn").
          s     don't give "search hit BOTTOM, continuing at TOP" or "search
                hit TOP, continuing at BOTTOM" messages
          t     truncate file message at the start if it is too long to fit
                on the command-line, "<" will appear in the left most column.
                Ignored in Ex mode.
          T     truncate other messages in the middle if they are too long to
                fit on the command line.  "..." will appear in the middle.
                Ignored in Ex mode.
          W     don't give "written" or "[w]" when writing a file
          A     don't give the "ATTENTION" message when an existing swap file
                is found.
          I     don't give the intro message when starting Vim |:intro|.

        This gives you the opportunity to avoid that a change between buffers
        requires you to hit <Enter>, but still gives as useful a message as
        possible for the space available.  To get the whole message that you
        would have got with 'shm' empty, use ":file!"
        Useful values:
            shm=        No abbreviation of message.
            shm=a       Abbreviation, but no loss of information.
            shm=at      Abbreviation, and truncate message when necessary.

        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                 *'shortname'* *'sn'* *'noshortname'* *'nosn'*
'shortname' 'sn'        boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi, not in MS-DOS versions}
        Filenames are assumed to be 8 characters plus one extension of 3
        characters.  Multiple dots in file names are not allowed.  When this
        option is on, dots in file names are replaced with underscores when
        adding an extension (".~" or ".swp").  This option is not available
        for MS-DOS, because then it would always be on.  This option is useful
        when editing files on an MS-DOS compatible filesystem, e.g., messydos
        or crossdos.  When running the Win32 GUI version under Win32s, this
        option is always on by default.

                                                *'showbreak'* *'sbr'* *E595*
'showbreak' 'sbr'       string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+linebreak|
                        feature}
        String to put at the start of lines that have been wrapped.  Useful
        values are "> " or "+++ ": >
                :set showbreak=>\ 
<       Note the backslash to escape the trailing space.  It's easier like
        this: >
                :let &showbreak = '+++ '
<       Only printable single-cell characters are allowed, excluding <Tab> and
        comma (in a future version the comma might be used to separate the
        part that is shown at the end and at the start of a line).
        The characters are highlighted according to the '@' flag in
        'highlight'.
        Note that tabs after the showbreak will be displayed differently.
        If you want the 'showbreak' to appear in between line numbers, add the
        "n" flag to 'cpoptions'.

                                     *'showcmd'* *'sc'* *'noshowcmd'* *'nosc'*
'showcmd' 'sc'          boolean (Vim default: on, off for Unix, Vi default:
                                 off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the
                        |+cmdline_info| feature}
        Show (partial) command in the last line of the screen.  Set this
        option off if your terminal is slow.
        In Visual mode the size of the selected area is shown:
        - When selecting characters within a line, the number of characters.
          If the number of bytes is different it is also displayed: "2-6"
          means two characters and six bytes.
        - When selecting more than one line, the number of lines.
        - When selecting a block, the size in screen characters:
          {lines}x{columns}.
        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                        *'showfulltag'* *'sft'* *'noshowfulltag'* *'nosft'*
'showfulltag' 'sft'     boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When completing a word in insert mode (see |ins-completion|) from the
        tags file, show both the tag name and a tidied-up form of the search
        pattern (if there is one) as possible matches.  Thus, if you have
        matched a C function, you can see a template for what arguments are
        required (coding style permitting).
        Note that this doesn't work well together with having "longest" in
        'completeopt', because the completion from the search pattern may not
        match the typed text.

                                 *'showmatch'* *'sm'* *'noshowmatch'* *'nosm'*
'showmatch' 'sm'        boolean (default off)
                        global
        When a bracket is inserted, briefly jump to the matching one.  The
        jump is only done if the match can be seen on the screen.  The time to
        show the match can be set with 'matchtime'.
        A Beep is given if there is no match (no matter if the match can be
        seen or not).  This option is reset when the 'paste' option is set.
        When the 'm' flag is not included in 'cpoptions', typing a character
        will immediately move the cursor back to where it belongs.
        See the "sm" field in 'guicursor' for setting the cursor shape and
        blinking when showing the match.
        The 'matchpairs' option can be used to specify the characters to show
        matches for.  'rightleft' and 'revins' are used to look for opposite
        matches.
        Also see the matchparen plugin for highlighting the match when moving
        around |pi_paren.txt|.
        Note: Use of the short form is rated PG.

                                 *'showmode'* *'smd'* *'noshowmode'* *'nosmd'*
'showmode' 'smd'        boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
                        global
        If in Insert, Replace or Visual mode put a message on the last line.
        Use the 'M' flag in 'highlight' to set the type of highlighting for
        this message.
        When |XIM| may be used the message will include "XIM".  But this
        doesn't mean XIM is really active, especially when 'imactivatekey' is
        not set.
        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                                *'showtabline'* *'stal'*
'showtabline' 'stal'    number  (default 1)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
                        feature}
        The value of this option specifies when the line with tab page labels
        will be displayed:
                0: never
                1: only if there are at least two tab pages
                2: always
        This is both for the GUI and non-GUI implementation of the tab pages
        line.
        See |tab-page| for more information about tab pages.

                                                *'sidescroll'* *'ss'*
'sidescroll' 'ss'       number  (default 0)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        The minimal number of columns to scroll horizontally.  Used only when
        the 'wrap' option is off and the cursor is moved off of the screen.
        When it is zero the cursor will be put in the middle of the screen.
        When using a slow terminal set it to a large number or 0.  When using
        a fast terminal use a small number or 1.  Not used for "zh" and "zl"
        commands.

                                                *'sidescrolloff'* *'siso'*
'sidescrolloff' 'siso'  number (default 0)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        The minimal number of screen columns to keep to the left and to the
        right of the cursor if 'nowrap' is set.  Setting this option to a
        value greater than 0 while having |'sidescroll'| also at a non-zero
        value makes some context visible in the line you are scrolling in
        horizontally (except at beginning of the line).  Setting this option
        to a large value (like 999) has the effect of keeping the cursor
        horizontally centered in the window, as long as one does not come too
        close to the beginning of the line.
        NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.

        Example: Try this together with 'sidescroll' and 'listchars' as
                 in the following example to never allow the cursor to move
                 onto the "extends" character:

                 :set nowrap sidescroll=1 listchars=extends:>,precedes:<
                 :set sidescrolloff=1


                        *'smartcase'* *'scs'* *'nosmartcase'* *'noscs'*
'smartcase' 'scs'       boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Override the 'ignorecase' option if the search pattern contains upper
        case characters.  Only used when the search pattern is typed and
        'ignorecase' option is on.  Used for the commands "/", "?", "n", "N",
        ":g" and ":s".  Not used for "*", "#", "gd", tag search, etc..  After
        "*" and "#" you can make 'smartcase' used by doing a "/" command,
        recalling the search pattern from history and hitting <Enter>.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                             *'smartindent'* *'si'* *'nosmartindent'* *'nosi'*
'smartindent' 'si'      boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the
                        |+smartindent| feature}
        Do smart autoindenting when starting a new line.  Works for C-like
        programs, but can also be used for other languages.  'cindent' does
        something like this, works better in most cases, but is more strict,
        see |C-indenting|.  When 'cindent' is on or 'indentexpr' is set,
        setting 'si' has no effect.  'indentexpr' is a more advanced
        alternative.
        Normally 'autoindent' should also be on when using 'smartindent'.
        An indent is automatically inserted:
        - After a line ending in '{'.
        - After a line starting with a keyword from 'cinwords'.
        - Before a line starting with '}' (only with the "O" command).
        When typing '}' as the first character in a new line, that line is
        given the same indent as the matching '{'.
        When typing '#' as the first character in a new line, the indent for
        that line is removed, the '#' is put in the first column.  The indent
        is restored for the next line.  If you don't want this, use this
        mapping: ":inoremap # X^H#", where ^H is entered with CTRL-V CTRL-H.
        When using the ">>" command, lines starting with '#' are not shifted
        right.
        NOTE: 'smartindent' is reset when 'compatible' is set.  When 'paste'
        is set smart indenting is disabled.

                                 *'smarttab'* *'sta'* *'nosmarttab'* *'nosta'*
'smarttab' 'sta'        boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When on, a <Tab> in front of a line inserts blanks according to
        'shiftwidth'.  'tabstop' or 'softtabstop' is used in other places.  A
        <BS> will delete a 'shiftwidth' worth of space at the start of the
        line.
        When off, a <Tab> always inserts blanks according to 'tabstop' or
        'softtabstop'.  'shiftwidth' is only used for shifting text left or
        right |shift-left-right|.
        What gets inserted (a <Tab> or spaces) depends on the 'expandtab'
        option.  Also see |ins-expandtab|.  When 'expandtab' is not set, the
        number of spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                        *'softtabstop'* *'sts'*
'softtabstop' 'sts'     number  (default 0)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        Number of spaces that a <Tab> counts for while performing editing
        operations, like inserting a <Tab> or using <BS>.  It "feels" like
        <Tab>s are being inserted, while in fact a mix of spaces and <Tab>s is
        used.  This is useful to keep the 'ts' setting at its standard value
        of 8, while being able to edit like it is set to 'sts'.  However,
        commands like "x" still work on the actual characters.
        When 'sts' is zero, this feature is off.
        'softtabstop' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.
        See also |ins-expandtab|.  When 'expandtab' is not set, the number of
        spaces is minimized by using <Tab>s.
        The 'L' flag in 'cpoptions' changes how tabs are used when 'list' is
        set.
        NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'spell'* *'nospell'*
'spell'                 boolean (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
                        feature}
        When on spell checking will be done.  See |spell|.
        The languages are specified with 'spelllang'.

                                                *'spellcapcheck'* *'spc'*
'spellcapcheck' 'spc'   string  (default "[.?!]\_[\])'" \t]\+")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
                        feature}
        Pattern to locate the end of a sentence.  The following word will be
        checked to start with a capital letter.  If not then it is highlighted
        with SpellCap |hl-SpellCap| (unless the word is also badly spelled).
        When this check is not wanted make this option empty.
        Only used when 'spell' is set.
        Be careful with special characters, see |option-backslash| about
        including spaces and backslashes.
        To set this option automatically depending on the language, see
        |set-spc-auto|.

                                                *'spellfile'* *'spf'*
'spellfile' 'spf'       string  (default empty)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
                        feature}
        Name of the word list file where words are added for the |zg| and |zw|
        commands.  It must end in ".{encoding}.add".  You need to include the
        path, otherwise the file is placed in the current directory.
                                                                *E765*
        It may also be a comma separated list of names.  A count before the
        |zg| and |zw| commands can be used to access each.  This allows using
        a personal word list file and a project word list file.
        When a word is added while this option is empty Vim will set it for
        you: Using the first directory in 'runtimepath' that is writable.  If
        there is no "spell" directory yet it will be created.  For the file
        name the first language name that appears in 'spelllang' is used,
        ignoring the region.
        The resulting ".spl" file will be used for spell checking, it does not
        have to appear in 'spelllang'.
        Normally one file is used for all regions, but you can add the region
        name if you want to.  However, it will then only be used when
        'spellfile' is set to it, for entries in 'spelllang' only files
        without region name will be found.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'spelllang'* *'spl'*
'spelllang' 'spl'       string  (default "en")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
                        feature}
        A comma separated list of word list names.  When the 'spell' option is
        on spellchecking will be done for these languages.  Example: >
                set spelllang=en_us,nl,medical
<       This means US English, Dutch and medical words are recognized.  Words
        that are not recognized will be highlighted.
        The word list name must not include a comma or dot.  Using a dash is
        recommended to separate the two letter language name from a
        specification.  Thus "en-rare" is used for rare English words.
        A region name must come last and have the form "_xx", where "xx" is
        the two-letter, lower case region name.  You can use more than one
        region by listing them: "en_us,en_ca" supports both US and Canadian
        English, but not words specific for Australia, New Zealand or Great
        Britain.
                                                        *E757*
        As a special case the name of a .spl file can be given as-is.  The
        first "_xx" in the name is removed and used as the region name
        (_xx is an underscore, two letters and followed by a non-letter).
        This is mainly for testing purposes.  You must make sure the correct
        encoding is used, Vim doesn't check it.
        When 'encoding' is set the word lists are reloaded.  Thus it's a good
        idea to set 'spelllang' after setting 'encoding' to avoid loading the
        files twice.
        How the related spell files are found is explained here: |spell-load|.

        If the |spellfile.vim| plugin is active and you use a language name
        for which Vim cannot find the .spl file in 'runtimepath' the plugin
        will ask you if you want to download the file.

        After this option has been set successfully, Vim will source the files
        "spell/LANG.vim" in 'runtimepath'.  "LANG" is the value of 'spelllang'
        up to the first comma, dot or underscore.
        Also see |set-spc-auto|.


                                                *'spellsuggest'* *'sps'*
'spellsuggest' 'sps'    string  (default "best")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
                        feature}
        Methods used for spelling suggestions.  Both for the |z=| command and
        the |spellsuggest()| function.  This is a comma-separated list of
        items:

        best            Internal method that works best for English.  Finds
                        changes like "fast" and uses a bit of sound-a-like
                        scoring to improve the ordering.

        double          Internal method that uses two methods and mixes the
                        results.  The first method is "fast", the other method
                        computes how much the suggestion sounds like the bad
                        word.  That only works when the language specifies
                        sound folding.  Can be slow and doesn't always give
                        better results.

        fast            Internal method that only checks for simple changes:
                        character inserts/deletes/swaps.  Works well for
                        simple typing mistakes.

        {number}        The maximum number of suggestions listed for |z=|.
                        Not used for |spellsuggest()|.  The number of
                        suggestions is never more than the value of 'lines'
                        minus two.

        file:{filename} Read file {filename}, which must have two columns,
                        separated by a slash.  The first column contains the
                        bad word, the second column the suggested good word.
                        Example:
                                theribal/terrible ~
                        Use this for common mistakes that do not appear at the
                        top of the suggestion list with the internal methods.
                        Lines without a slash are ignored, use this for
                        comments.
                        The file is used for all languages.

        expr:{expr}     Evaluate expression {expr}.  Use a function to avoid
                        trouble with spaces.  |v:val| holds the badly spelled
                        word.  The expression must evaluate to a List of
                        Lists, each with a suggestion and a score.
                        Example:
                                [['the', 33], ['that', 44]]
                        Set 'verbose' and use |z=| to see the scores that the
                        internal methods use.  A lower score is better.
                        This may invoke |spellsuggest()| if you temporarily
                        set 'spellsuggest' to exclude the "expr:" part.
                        Errors are silently ignored, unless you set the
                        'verbose' option to a non-zero value.

        Only one of "best", "double" or "fast" may be used.  The others may
        appear several times in any order.  Example: >
                :set sps=file:~/.vim/sugg,best,expr:MySuggest()
<
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.


                        *'splitbelow'* *'sb'* *'nosplitbelow'* *'nosb'*
'splitbelow' 'sb'       boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
                        feature}
        When on, splitting a window will put the new window below the current
        one. |:split|

                        *'splitright'* *'spr'* *'nosplitright'* *'nospr'*
'splitright' 'spr'      boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
                        feature}
        When on, splitting a window will put the new window right of the
        current one. |:vsplit|

                           *'startofline'* *'sol'* *'nostartofline'* *'nosol'*
'startofline' 'sol'     boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When "on" the commands listed below move the cursor to the first
        non-blank of the line.  When off the cursor is kept in the same column
        (if possible).  This applies to the commands: CTRL-D, CTRL-U, CTRL-B,
        CTRL-F, "G", "H", "M", "L", gg, and to the commands "d", "<<" and ">>"
        with a linewise operator, with "%" with a count and to buffer changing
        commands (CTRL-^, :bnext, :bNext, etc.).  Also for an Ex command that
        only has a line number, e.g., ":25" or ":+".
        In case of buffer changing commands the cursor is placed at the column
        where it was the last time the buffer was edited.
        NOTE: This option is set when 'compatible' is set.

                           *'statusline'* *'stl'* *E540* *E542*
'statusline' 'stl'      string  (default empty)
                        global or local to window |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+statusline|
                        feature}
        When nonempty, this option determines the content of the status line.
        Also see |status-line|.

        The option consists of printf style '%' items interspersed with
        normal text.  Each status line item is of the form:
          %-0{minwid}.{maxwid}{item}
        All fields except the {item} is optional.  A single percent sign can
        be given as "%%".  Up to 80 items can be specified.  *E541*

        When the option starts with "%!" then it is used as an expression,
        evaluated and the result is used as the option value.  Example: >
                :set statusline=%!MyStatusLine()
<       The result can contain %{} items that will be evaluated too.

        When there is error while evaluating the option then it will be made
        empty to avoid further errors.  Otherwise screen updating would loop.

        Note that the only effect of 'ruler' when this option is set (and
        'laststatus' is 2) is controlling the output of |CTRL-G|.

        field       meaning ~
        -           Left justify the item.  The default is right justified
                    when minwid is larger than the length of the item.
        0           Leading zeroes in numeric items.  Overridden by '-'.
        minwid      Minimum width of the item, padding as set by '-' & '0'.
                    Value must be 50 or less.
        maxwid      Maximum width of the item.  Truncation occurs with a '<'
                    on the left for text items.  Numeric items will be
                    shifted down to maxwid-2 digits followed by '>'number
                    where number is the amount of missing digits, much like
                    an exponential notation.
        item        A one letter code as described below.

        Following is a description of the possible statusline items.  The
        second character in "item" is the type:
                N for number
                S for string
                F for flags as described below
                - not applicable

        item  meaning ~
        f S   Path to the file in the buffer, as typed or relative to current
              directory.
        F S   Full path to the file in the buffer.
        t S   File name (tail) of file in the buffer.
        m F   Modified flag, text is "[+]"; "[-]" if 'modifiable' is off.
        M F   Modified flag, text is ",+" or ",-".
        r F   Readonly flag, text is "[RO]".
        R F   Readonly flag, text is ",RO".
        h F   Help buffer flag, text is "[help]".
        H F   Help buffer flag, text is ",HLP".
        w F   Preview window flag, text is "[Preview]".
        W F   Preview window flag, text is ",PRV".
        y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., "[vim]".  See 'filetype'.
        Y F   Type of file in the buffer, e.g., ",VIM".  See 'filetype'.
              {not available when compiled without |+autocmd| feature}
        q S   "[Quickfix List]", "[Location List]" or empty.
        k S   Value of "b:keymap_name" or 'keymap' when |:lmap| mappings are
              being used: "<keymap>"
        n N   Buffer number.
        b N   Value of character under cursor.
        B N   As above, in hexadecimal.
        o N   Byte number in file of byte under cursor, first byte is 1.
              Mnemonic: Offset from start of file (with one added)
              {not available when compiled without |+byte_offset| feature}
        O N   As above, in hexadecimal.
        N N   Printer page number.  (Only works in the 'printheader' option.)
        l N   Line number.
        L N   Number of lines in buffer.
        c N   Column number.
        v N   Virtual column number.
        V N   Virtual column number as -{num}.  Not displayed if equal to 'c'.
        p N   Percentage through file in lines as in |CTRL-G|.
        P S   Percentage through file of displayed window.  This is like the
              percentage described for 'ruler'.  Always 3 in length.
        a S   Argument list status as in default title.  ({current} of {max})
              Empty if the argument file count is zero or one.
        { NF  Evaluate expression between '%{' and '}' and substitute result.
              Note that there is no '%' before the closing '}'.
        ( -   Start of item group.  Can be used for setting the width and
              alignment of a section.  Must be followed by %) somewhere.
        ) -   End of item group.  No width fields allowed.
        T N   For 'tabline': start of tab page N label.  Use %T after the last
              label.  This information is used for mouse clicks.
        X N   For 'tabline': start of close tab N label.  Use %X after the
              label, e.g.: %3Xclose%X.  Use %999X for a "close current tab"
              mark.  This information is used for mouse clicks.
        < -   Where to truncate line if too long.  Default is at the start.
              No width fields allowed.
        = -   Separation point between left and right aligned items.
              No width fields allowed.
        # -   Set highlight group.  The name must follow and then a # again.
              Thus use %#HLname# for highlight group HLname.  The same
              highlighting is used, also for the statusline of non-current
              windows.
        * -   Set highlight group to User{N}, where {N} is taken from the
              minwid field, e.g. %1*.  Restore normal highlight with %* or %0*.
              The difference between User{N} and StatusLine  will be applied
              to StatusLineNC for the statusline of non-current windows.
              The number N must be between 1 and 9.  See |hl-User1..9|

        When displaying a flag, Vim removes the leading comma, if any, when
        that flag comes right after plaintext.  This will make a nice display
        when flags are used like in the examples below.

        When all items in a group becomes an empty string (i.e. flags that are
        not set) and a minwid is not set for the group, the whole group will
        become empty.  This will make a group like the following disappear
        completely from the statusline when none of the flags are set. >
                :set statusline=...%(\ [%M%R%H]%)...
<
        Beware that an expression is evaluated each and every time the status
        line is displayed.  The current buffer and current window will be set
        temporarily to that of the window (and buffer) whose statusline is
        currently being drawn.  The expression will evaluate in this context.
        The variable "actual_curbuf" is set to the 'bufnr()' number of the
        real current buffer.

        The 'statusline' option may be evaluated in the |sandbox|, see
        |sandbox-option|.

        It is not allowed to change text or jump to another window while
        evaluating 'statusline' |textlock|.

        If the statusline is not updated when you want it (e.g., after setting
        a variable that's used in an expression), you can force an update by
        setting an option without changing its value.  Example: >
                :let &ro = &ro

<       A result of all digits is regarded a number for display purposes.
        Otherwise the result is taken as flag text and applied to the rules
        described above.

        Watch out for errors in expressions.  They may render Vim unusable!
        If you are stuck, hold down ':' or 'Q' to get a prompt, then quit and
        edit your .vimrc or whatever with "vim -u NONE" to get it right.

        Examples:
        Emulate standard status line with 'ruler' set >
          :set statusline=%<%f\ %h%m%r%=%-14.(%l,%c%V%)\ %P
<       Similar, but add ASCII value of char under the cursor (like "ga") >
          :set statusline=%<%f%h%m%r%=%b\ 0x%B\ \ %l,%c%V\ %P
<       Display byte count and byte value, modified flag in red. >
          :set statusline=%<%f%=\ [%1*%M%*%n%R%H]\ %-19(%3l,%02c%03V%)%O'%02b'
          :hi User1 term=inverse,bold cterm=inverse,bold ctermfg=red
<       Display a ,GZ flag if a compressed file is loaded >
          :set statusline=...%r%{VarExists('b:gzflag','\ [GZ]')}%h...
<       In the |:autocmd|'s: >
          :let b:gzflag = 1
<       And: >
          :unlet b:gzflag
<       And define this function: >
          :function VarExists(var, val)
          :    if exists(a:var) | return a:val | else | return '' | endif
          :endfunction
<
                                                *'suffixes'* *'su'*
'suffixes' 'su'         string  (default ".bak,~,.o,.h,.info,.swp,.obj")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Files with these suffixes get a lower priority when multiple files
        match a wildcard.  See |suffixes|.  Commas can be used to separate the
        suffixes.  Spaces after the comma are ignored.  A dot is also seen as
        the start of a suffix.  To avoid a dot or comma being recognized as a
        separator, precede it with a backslash (see |option-backslash| about
        including spaces and backslashes).
        See 'wildignore' for completely ignoring files.
        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        suffixes from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.

                                                *'suffixesadd'* *'sua'*
'suffixesadd' 'sua'     string  (default "")
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the
                        |+file_in_path| feature}
        Comma separated list of suffixes, which are used when searching for a
        file for the "gf", "[I", etc. commands.  Example: >
                :set suffixesadd=.java
<
                                *'swapfile'* *'swf'* *'noswapfile'* *'noswf'*
'swapfile' 'swf'        boolean (default on)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        Use a swapfile for the buffer.  This option can be reset when a
        swapfile is not wanted for a specific buffer.  For example, with
        confidential information that even root must not be able to access.
        Careful: All text will be in memory:
                - Don't use this for big files.
                - Recovery will be impossible!
        A swapfile will only be present when |'updatecount'| is non-zero and
        'swapfile' is set.
        When 'swapfile' is reset, the swap file for the current buffer is
        immediately deleted.  When 'swapfile' is set, and 'updatecount' is
        non-zero, a swap file is immediately created.
        Also see |swap-file| and |'swapsync'|.

        This option is used together with 'bufhidden' and 'buftype' to
        specify special kinds of buffers.   See |special-buffers|.

                                                *'swapsync'* *'sws'*
'swapsync' 'sws'        string  (default "fsync")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When this option is not empty a swap file is synced to disk after
        writing to it.  This takes some time, especially on busy unix systems.
        When this option is empty parts of the swap file may be in memory and
        not written to disk.  When the system crashes you may lose more work.
        On Unix the system does a sync now and then without Vim asking for it,
        so the disadvantage of setting this option off is small.  On some
        systems the swap file will not be written at all.  For a unix system
        setting it to "sync" will use the sync() call instead of the default
        fsync(), which may work better on some systems.
        The 'fsync' option is used for the actual file.

                                                *'switchbuf'* *'swb'*
'switchbuf' 'swb'       string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        This option controls the behavior when switching between buffers.
        Possible values (comma separated list):
           useopen      If included, jump to the first open window that
                        contains the specified buffer (if there is one).
                        Otherwise: Do not examine other windows.
                        This setting is checked with |quickfix| commands, when
                        jumping to errors (":cc", ":cn", "cp", etc.).  It is
                        also used in all buffer related split commands, for
                        example ":sbuffer", ":sbnext", or ":sbrewind".
           usetab       Like "useopen", but also consider windows in other tab
                        pages.
           split        If included, split the current window before loading
                        a buffer for a |quickfix| command that display errors.
                        Otherwise: do not split, use current window.
           newtab       Like "split", but open a new tab page.  Overrules
                        "split" when both are present.

                                                *'synmaxcol'* *'smc'*
'synmaxcol' 'smc'       number  (default 3000)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
                        feature}
        Maximum column in which to search for syntax items.  In long lines the
        text after this column is not highlighted and following lines may not
        be highlighted correctly, because the syntax state is cleared.
        This helps to avoid very slow redrawing for an XML file that is one
        long line.
        Set to zero to remove the limit.

                                                *'syntax'* *'syn'*
'syntax' 'syn'          string  (default empty)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+syntax|
                        feature}
        When this option is set, the syntax with this name is loaded, unless
        syntax highlighting has been switched off with ":syntax off".
        Otherwise this option does not always reflect the current syntax (the
        b:current_syntax variable does).
        This option is most useful in a modeline, for a file which syntax is
        not automatically recognized.  Example, in an IDL file:
                /* vim: set syntax=idl : */ ~
        When a dot appears in the value then this separates two filetype
        names.  Example:
                /* vim: set syntax=c.doxygen : */ ~
        This will use the "c" syntax first, then the "doxygen" syntax.
        Note that the second one must be prepared to be loaded as an addition,
        otherwise it will be skipped.  More than one dot may appear.
        To switch off syntax highlighting for the current file, use: >
                :set syntax=OFF
<       To switch syntax highlighting on according to the current value of the
        'filetype' option: >
                :set syntax=ON
<       What actually happens when setting the 'syntax' option is that the
        Syntax autocommand event is triggered with the value as argument.
        This option is not copied to another buffer, independent of the 's' or
        'S' flag in 'cpoptions'.
        Only normal file name characters can be used, "/\*?[|<>" are illegal.

                                                *'tabline'* *'tal'*
'tabline' 'tal'         string  (default empty)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
                        feature}
        When nonempty, this option determines the content of the tab pages
        line at the top of the Vim window.  When empty Vim will use a default
        tab pages line.  See |setting-tabline| for more info.

        The tab pages line only appears as specified with the 'showtabline'
        option and only when there is no GUI tab line.  When 'e' is in
        'guioptions' and the GUI supports a tab line 'guitablabel' is used
        instead.  Note that the two tab pages lines are very different.

        The value is evaluated like with 'statusline'.  You can use
        |tabpagenr()|, |tabpagewinnr()| and |tabpagebuflist()| to figure out
        the text to be displayed.  Use "%1T" for the first label, "%2T" for
        the second one, etc.  Use "%X" items for closing labels.

        Keep in mind that only one of the tab pages is the current one, others
        are invisible and you can't jump to their windows.


                                                *'tabpagemax'* *'tpm'*
'tabpagemax' 'tpm'      number  (default 10)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
                        feature}
        Maximum number of tab pages to be opened by the |-p| command line
        argument or the ":tab all" command. |tabpage|


                                                *'tabstop'* *'ts'*
'tabstop' 'ts'          number  (default 8)
                        local to buffer
        Number of spaces that a <Tab> in the file counts for.  Also see
        |:retab| command, and 'softtabstop' option.

        Note: Setting 'tabstop' to any other value than 8 can make your file
        appear wrong in many places (e.g., when printing it).

        There are four main ways to use tabs in Vim:
        1. Always keep 'tabstop' at 8, set 'softtabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to 4
           (or 3 or whatever you prefer) and use 'noexpandtab'.  Then Vim
           will use a mix of tabs and spaces, but typing <Tab> and <BS> will
           behave like a tab appears every 4 (or 3) characters.
        2. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use
           'expandtab'.  This way you will always insert spaces.  The
           formatting will never be messed up when 'tabstop' is changed.
        3. Set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to whatever you prefer and use a
           |modeline| to set these values when editing the file again.  Only
           works when using Vim to edit the file.
        4. Always set 'tabstop' and 'shiftwidth' to the same value, and
           'noexpandtab'.  This should then work (for initial indents only)
           for any tabstop setting that people use.  It might be nice to have
           tabs after the first non-blank inserted as spaces if you do this
           though.  Otherwise aligned comments will be wrong when 'tabstop' is
           changed.

                        *'tagbsearch'* *'tbs'* *'notagbsearch'* *'notbs'*
'tagbsearch' 'tbs'      boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When searching for a tag (e.g., for the |:ta| command), Vim can either
        use a binary search or a linear search in a tags file.  Binary
        searching makes searching for a tag a LOT faster, but a linear search
        will find more tags if the tags file wasn't properly sorted.
        Vim normally assumes that your tags files are sorted, or indicate that
        they are not sorted.  Only when this is not the case does the
        'tagbsearch' option need to be switched off.

        When 'tagbsearch' is on, binary searching is first used in the tags
        files.  In certain situations, Vim will do a linear search instead for
        certain files, or retry all files with a linear search.  When
        'tagbsearch' is off, only a linear search is done.

        Linear searching is done anyway, for one file, when Vim finds a line
        at the start of the file indicating that it's not sorted: >
   !_TAG_FILE_SORTED    0       /some comment/
<       [The whitespace before and after the '0' must be a single <Tab>]

        When a binary search was done and no match was found in any of the
        files listed in 'tags', and 'ignorecase' is set or a pattern is used
        instead of a normal tag name, a retry is done with a linear search.
        Tags in unsorted tags files, and matches with different case will only
        be found in the retry.

        If a tag file indicates that it is case-fold sorted, the second,
        linear search can be avoided for the 'ignorecase' case.  Use a value
        of '2' in the "!_TAG_FILE_SORTED" line for this.  A tag file can be
        case-fold sorted with the -f switch to "sort" in most unices, as in
        the command: "sort -f -o tags tags".  For "Exuberant ctags" version
        5.x or higher (at least 5.5) the --sort=foldcase switch can be used
        for this as well.  Note that case must be folded to uppercase for this
        to work.

        When 'tagbsearch' is off, tags searching is slower when a full match
        exists, but faster when no full match exists.  Tags in unsorted tags
        files may only be found with 'tagbsearch' off.
        When the tags file is not sorted, or sorted in a wrong way (not on
        ASCII byte value), 'tagbsearch' should be off, or the line given above
        must be included in the tags file.
        This option doesn't affect commands that find all matching tags (e.g.,
        command-line completion and ":help").
        {Vi: always uses binary search in some versions}

                                                *'taglength'* *'tl'*
'taglength' 'tl'        number  (default 0)
                        global
        If non-zero, tags are significant up to this number of characters.

                        *'tagrelative'* *'tr'* *'notagrelative'* *'notr'*
'tagrelative' 'tr'      boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        If on and using a tags file in another directory, file names in that
        tags file are relative to the directory where the tags file is.
        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                                *'tags'* *'tag'* *E433*
'tags' 'tag'            string  (default "./tags,tags", when compiled with
                                |+emacs_tags|: "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS")
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
        Filenames for the tag command, separated by spaces or commas.  To
        include a space or comma in a file name, precede it with a backslash
        (see |option-backslash| about including spaces and backslashes).
        When a file name starts with "./", the '.' is replaced with the path
        of the current file.  But only when the 'd' flag is not included in
        'cpoptions'.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.  Also see
        |tags-option|.
        "*", "**" and other wildcards can be used to search for tags files in
        a directory tree.  See |file-searching|.  E.g., "/lib/**/tags" will
        find all files named "tags" below "/lib".  The filename itself cannot
        contain wildcards, it is used as-is.  E.g., "/lib/**/tags?" will find
        files called "tags?".  {not available when compiled without the
        |+path_extra| feature}
        The |tagfiles()| function can be used to get a list of the file names
        actually used.
        If Vim was compiled with the |+emacs_tags| feature, Emacs-style tag
        files are also supported.  They are automatically recognized.  The
        default value becomes "./tags,./TAGS,tags,TAGS", unless case
        differences are ignored (MS-Windows).  |emacs-tags|
        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        file names from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.
        {Vi: default is "tags /usr/lib/tags"}

                                *'tagstack'* *'tgst'* *'notagstack'* *'notgst'*
'tagstack' 'tgst'       boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in all versions of Vi}
        When on, the |tagstack| is used normally.  When off, a ":tag" or
        ":tselect" command with an argument will not push the tag onto the
        tagstack.  A following ":tag" without an argument, a ":pop" command or
        any other command that uses the tagstack will use the unmodified
        tagstack, but does change the pointer to the active entry.
        Resetting this option is useful when using a ":tag" command in a
        mapping which should not change the tagstack.

                                                *'term'* *E529* *E530* *E531*
'term'                  string  (default is $TERM, if that fails:
                                      in the GUI: "builtin_gui"
                                        on Amiga: "amiga"
                                         on BeOS: "beos-ansi"
                                          on Mac: "mac-ansi"
                                         on MiNT: "vt52"
                                       on MS-DOS: "pcterm"
                                         on OS/2: "os2ansi"
                                         on Unix: "ansi"
                                          on VMS: "ansi"
                                       on Win 32: "win32")
                        global
        Name of the terminal.  Used for choosing the terminal control
        characters.  Environment variables are expanded |:set_env|.
        For example: >
                :set term=$TERM
<       See |termcap|.

                                                *'termbidi'* *'tbidi'*
                                                *'notermbidi'* *'notbidi'*
'termbidi' 'tbidi'      boolean (default off, on for "mlterm")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+arabic|
                        feature}
        The terminal is in charge of Bi-directionality of text (as specified
        by Unicode).  The terminal is also expected to do the required shaping
        that some languages (such as Arabic) require.
        Setting this option implies that 'rightleft' will not be set when
        'arabic' is set and the value of 'arabicshape' will be ignored.
        Note that setting 'termbidi' has the immediate effect that
        'arabicshape' is ignored, but 'rightleft' isn't changed automatically.
        This option is reset when the GUI is started.
        For further details see |arabic.txt|.

                                        *'termencoding'* *'tenc'*
'termencoding' 'tenc'   string  (default ""; with GTK+ 2 GUI: "utf-8"; with
                                                    Macintosh GUI: "macroman")
                        global
                        {only available when compiled with the |+multi_byte|
                        feature}
                        {not in Vi}
        Encoding used for the terminal.  This specifies what character
        encoding the keyboard produces and the display will understand.  For
        the GUI it only applies to the keyboard ('encoding' is used for the
        display).  Except for the Mac when 'macatsui' is off, then
        'termencoding' should be "macroman".
        In the Win32 console version the default value is the console codepage
        when it differs from the ANSI codepage.
                                                                *E617*
        Note: This does not apply to the GTK+ 2 GUI.  After the GUI has been
        successfully initialized, 'termencoding' is forcibly set to "utf-8".
        Any attempts to set a different value will be rejected, and an error
        message is shown.
        For the Win32 GUI 'termencoding' is not used for typed characters,
        because the Win32 system always passes Unicode characters.
        When empty, the same encoding is used as for the 'encoding' option.
        This is the normal value.
        Not all combinations for 'termencoding' and 'encoding' are valid.  See
        |encoding-table|.
        The value for this option must be supported by internal conversions or
        iconv().  When this is not possible no conversion will be done and you
        will probably experience problems with non-ASCII characters.
        Example: You are working with the locale set to euc-jp (Japanese) and
        want to edit a UTF-8 file: >
                :let &termencoding = &encoding
                :set encoding=utf-8
<       You need to do this when your system has no locale support for UTF-8.

                                                *'terse'* *'noterse'*
'terse'                 boolean (default off)
                        global
        When set: Add 's' flag to 'shortmess' option (this makes the message
        for a search that hits the start or end of the file not being
        displayed).  When reset: Remove 's' flag from 'shortmess' option.  {Vi
        shortens a lot of messages}

                                   *'textauto'* *'ta'* *'notextauto'* *'nota'*
'textauto' 'ta'         boolean (Vim default: on, Vi default: off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        This option is obsolete.  Use 'fileformats'.
        For backwards compatibility, when 'textauto' is set, 'fileformats' is
        set to the default value for the current system.  When 'textauto' is
        reset, 'fileformats' is made empty.
        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                   *'textmode'* *'tx'* *'notextmode'* *'notx'*
'textmode' 'tx'         boolean (MS-DOS, Win32 and OS/2: default on,
                                 others: default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        This option is obsolete.  Use 'fileformat'.
        For backwards compatibility, when 'textmode' is set, 'fileformat' is
        set to "dos".  When 'textmode' is reset, 'fileformat' is set to
        "unix".

                                                *'textwidth'* *'tw'*
'textwidth' 'tw'        number  (default 0)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
        Maximum width of text that is being inserted.  A longer line will be
        broken after white space to get this width.  A zero value disables
        this.  'textwidth' is set to 0 when the 'paste' option is set.  When
        'textwidth' is zero, 'wrapmargin' may be used.  See also
        'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.
        When 'formatexpr' is set it will be used to break the line.
        NOTE: This option is set to 0 when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'thesaurus'* *'tsr'*
'thesaurus' 'tsr'       string  (default "")
                        global or local to buffer |global-local|
                        {not in Vi}
        List of file names, separated by commas, that are used to lookup words
        for thesaurus completion commands |i_CTRL-X_CTRL-T|.  Each line in
        the file should contain words with similar meaning, separated by
        non-keyword characters (white space is preferred).  Maximum line
        length is 510 bytes.
        To obtain a file to be used here, check out the wordlist FAQ at
        http://www.hyphenologist.co.uk .
        To include a comma in a file name precede it with a backslash.  Spaces
        after a comma are ignored, otherwise spaces are included in the file
        name.  See |option-backslash| about using backslashes.
        The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        directories from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.
        Backticks cannot be used in this option for security reasons.

                             *'tildeop'* *'top'* *'notildeop'* *'notop'*
'tildeop' 'top'         boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When on: The tilde command "~" behaves like an operator.
        NOTE: This option is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                *'timeout'* *'to'* *'notimeout'* *'noto'*
'timeout' 'to'          boolean (default on)
                        global
                                                *'ttimeout'* *'nottimeout'*
'ttimeout'              boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        These two options together determine the behavior when part of a
        mapped key sequence or keyboard code has been received:

        'timeout'    'ttimeout'         action  ~
           off          off             do not time out
           on           on or off       time out on :mappings and key codes
           off          on              time out on key codes

        If both options are off, Vim will wait until either the complete
        mapping or key sequence has been received, or it is clear that there
        is no mapping or key sequence for the received characters.  For
        example: if you have mapped "vl" and Vim has received 'v', the next
        character is needed to see if the 'v' is followed by an 'l'.
        When one of the options is on, Vim will wait for about 1 second for
        the next character to arrive.  After that the already received
        characters are interpreted as single characters.  The waiting time can
        be changed with the 'timeoutlen' option.
        On slow terminals or very busy systems timing out may cause
        malfunctioning cursor keys.  If both options are off, Vim waits
        forever after an entered <Esc> if there are key codes that start
        with <Esc>.  You will have to type <Esc> twice.  If you do not have
        problems with key codes, but would like to have :mapped key
        sequences not timing out in 1 second, set the 'ttimeout' option and
        reset the 'timeout' option.

        NOTE: 'ttimeout' is reset when 'compatible' is set.

                                                *'timeoutlen'* *'tm'*
'timeoutlen' 'tm'       number  (default 1000)
                        global
                        {not in all versions of Vi}
                                                *'ttimeoutlen'* *'ttm'*
'ttimeoutlen' 'ttm'     number  (default -1)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        The time in milliseconds that is waited for a key code or mapped key
        sequence to complete.  Also used for CTRL-\ CTRL-N and CTRL-\ CTRL-G
        when part of a command has been typed.
        Normally only 'timeoutlen' is used and 'ttimeoutlen' is -1.  When a
        different timeout value for key codes is desired set 'ttimeoutlen' to
        a non-negative number.

                ttimeoutlen     mapping delay      key code delay       ~
                   < 0          'timeoutlen'       'timeoutlen'
                  >= 0          'timeoutlen'       'ttimeoutlen'

        The timeout only happens when the 'timeout' and 'ttimeout' options
        tell so.  A useful setting would be >
                :set timeout timeoutlen=3000 ttimeoutlen=100
<       (time out on mapping after three seconds, time out on key codes after
        a tenth of a second).

                                                *'title'* *'notitle'*
'title'                 boolean (default off, on when title can be restored)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+title|
                        feature}
        When on, the title of the window will be set to the value of
        'titlestring' (if it is not empty), or to:
                filename [+=-] (path) - VIM
        Where:
                filename        the name of the file being edited
                -               indicates the file cannot be modified, 'ma' off
                +               indicates the file was modified
                =               indicates the file is read-only
                =+              indicates the file is read-only and modified
                (path)          is the path of the file being edited
                - VIM           the server name |v:servername| or "VIM"
        Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles
        (currently Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and
        terminals with a non- empty 't_ts' option - these are Unix xterm and
        iris-ansi by default, where 't_ts' is taken from the builtin termcap).
                                                                *X11*
        When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
        be restored if possible.  The output of ":version" will include "+X11"
        when HAVE_X11 was defined, otherwise it will be "-X11".  This also
        works for the icon name |'icon'|.
        But: When Vim was started with the |-X| argument, restoring the title
        will not work (except in the GUI).
        If the title cannot be restored, it is set to the value of 'titleold'.
        You might want to restore the title outside of Vim then.
        When using an xterm from a remote machine you can use this command:
            rsh machine_name xterm -display $DISPLAY &
        then the WINDOWID environment variable should be inherited and the
        title of the window should change back to what it should be after
        exiting Vim.

                                                                *'titlelen'*
'titlelen'              number  (default 85)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+title|
                        feature}
        Gives the percentage of 'columns' to use for the length of the window
        title.  When the title is longer, only the end of the path name is
        shown.  A '<' character before the path name is used to indicate this.
        Using a percentage makes this adapt to the width of the window.  But
        it won't work perfectly, because the actual number of characters
        available also depends on the font used and other things in the title
        bar.  When 'titlelen' is zero the full path is used.  Otherwise,
        values from 1 to 30000 percent can be used.
        'titlelen' is also used for the 'titlestring' option.

                                                *'titleold'*
'titleold'              string  (default "Thanks for flying Vim")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only available when compiled with the |+title|
                        feature}
        This option will be used for the window title when exiting Vim if the
        original title cannot be restored.  Only happens if 'title' is on or
        'titlestring' is not empty.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.
                                                *'titlestring'*
'titlestring'           string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+title|
                        feature}
        When this option is not empty, it will be used for the title of the
        window.  This happens only when the 'title' option is on.
        Only works if the terminal supports setting window titles (currently
        Amiga console, Win32 console, all GUI versions and terminals with a
        non-empty 't_ts' option).
        When Vim was compiled with HAVE_X11 defined, the original title will
        be restored if possible |X11|.
        When this option contains printf-style '%' items, they will be
        expanded according to the rules used for 'statusline'.
        Example: >
    :auto BufEnter * let &titlestring = hostname() . "/" . expand("%:p")
    :set title titlestring=%<%F%=%l/%L-%P titlelen=70
<       The value of 'titlelen' is used to align items in the middle or right
        of the available space.
        Some people prefer to have the file name first: >
    :set titlestring=%t%(\ %M%)%(\ (%{expand(\"%:~:.:h\")})%)%(\ %a%)
<       Note the use of "%{ }" and an expression to get the path of the file,
        without the file name.  The "%( %)" constructs are used to add a
        separating space only when needed.
        NOTE: Use of special characters in 'titlestring' may cause the display
        to be garbled (e.g., when it contains a CR or NL character).
        {not available when compiled without the |+statusline| feature}

                                *'toolbar'* *'tb'*
'toolbar' 'tb'          string  (default "icons,tooltips")
                        global
                        {only for |+GUI_GTK|, |+GUI_Athena|, |+GUI_Motif| and
                        |+GUI_Photon|}
        The contents of this option controls various toolbar settings.  The
        possible values are:
                icons           Toolbar buttons are shown with icons.
                text            Toolbar buttons shown with text.
                horiz           Icon and text of a toolbar button are
                                horizontally arranged.  {only in GTK+ 2 GUI}
                tooltips        Tooltips are active for toolbar buttons.
        Tooltips refer to the popup help text which appears after the mouse
        cursor is placed over a toolbar button for a brief moment.

        If you want the toolbar to be shown with icons as well as text, do the
        following: >
                :set tb=icons,text
<       Motif and Athena cannot display icons and text at the same time.  They
        will show icons if both are requested.

        If none of the strings specified in 'toolbar' are valid or if
        'toolbar' is empty, this option is ignored.  If you want to disable
        the toolbar, you need to set the 'guioptions' option.  For example: >
                :set guioptions-=T
<       Also see |gui-toolbar|.

                                                *'toolbariconsize'* *'tbis'*
'toolbariconsize' 'tbis'        string  (default "small")
                                global
                                {not in Vi}
                                {only in the GTK+ 2 GUI}
        Controls the size of toolbar icons.  The possible values are:
                tiny            Use tiny toolbar icons.
                small           Use small toolbar icons (default).
                medium          Use medium-sized toolbar icons.
                large           Use large toolbar icons.
        The exact dimensions in pixels of the various icon sizes depend on
        the current theme.  Common dimensions are large=32x32, medium=24x24,
        small=20x20 and tiny=16x16.

        If 'toolbariconsize' is empty, the global default size as determined
        by user preferences or the current theme is used.

                             *'ttybuiltin'* *'tbi'* *'nottybuiltin'* *'notbi'*
'ttybuiltin' 'tbi'      boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When on, the builtin termcaps are searched before the external ones.
        When off the builtin termcaps are searched after the external ones.
        When this option is changed, you should set the 'term' option next for
        the change to take effect, for example: >
                :set notbi term=$TERM
<       See also |termcap|.
        Rationale: The default for this option is "on", because the builtin
        termcap entries are generally better (many systems contain faulty
        xterm entries...).

                                     *'ttyfast'* *'tf'* *'nottyfast'* *'notf'*
'ttyfast' 'tf'          boolean (default off, on when 'term' is xterm, hpterm,
                                        sun-cmd, screen, rxvt, dtterm or
                                        iris-ansi; also on when running Vim in
                                        a DOS console)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Indicates a fast terminal connection.  More characters will be sent to
        the screen for redrawing, instead of using insert/delete line
        commands.  Improves smoothness of redrawing when there are multiple
        windows and the terminal does not support a scrolling region.
        Also enables the extra writing of characters at the end of each screen
        line for lines that wrap.  This helps when using copy/paste with the
        mouse in an xterm and other terminals.

                                                *'ttymouse'* *'ttym'*
'ttymouse' 'ttym'       string  (default depends on 'term')
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only in Unix and VMS, doesn't work in the GUI; not
                        available when compiled without |+mouse|}
        Name of the terminal type for which mouse codes are to be recognized.
        Currently these strings are valid:
                                                        *xterm-mouse*
           xterm        xterm-like mouse handling.  The mouse generates
                        "<Esc>[Mscr", where "scr" is three bytes:
                                "s"  = button state
                                "c"  = column plus 33
                                "r"  = row plus 33
                        This only works up to 223 columns!  See "dec" for a
                        solution.
           xterm2       Works like "xterm", but with the xterm reporting the
                        mouse position while the mouse is dragged.  This works
                        much faster and more precise.  Your xterm must at
                        least at patchlevel 88 / XFree 3.3.3 for this to
                        work.  See below for how Vim detects this
                        automatically.
                                                        *netterm-mouse*
           netterm      NetTerm mouse handling.  The mouse generates
                        "<Esc>}r,c<CR>", where "r,c" are two decimal numbers
                        for the row and column.
                                                        *dec-mouse*
           dec          DEC terminal mouse handling.  The mouse generates a
                        rather complex sequence, starting with "<Esc>[".
                        This is also available for an Xterm, if it was
                        configured with "--enable-dec-locator".
                                                        *jsbterm-mouse*
           jsbterm      JSB term mouse handling.
                                                        *pterm-mouse*
           pterm        QNX pterm mouse handling.
                                                        *urxvt-mouse*
           urxvt        Mouse handling for the urxvt (rxvt-unicode) terminal.

        The mouse handling must be enabled at compile time |+mouse_xterm|
        |+mouse_dec| |+mouse_netterm|.
        Only "xterm"(2) is really recognized.  NetTerm mouse codes are always
        recognized, if enabled at compile time.  DEC terminal mouse codes
        are recognized if enabled at compile time, and 'ttymouse' is not
        "xterm" (because the xterm and dec mouse codes conflict).
        This option is automatically set to "xterm", when the 'term' option is
        set to a name that starts with "xterm", and 'ttymouse' is not "xterm"
        or "xterm2" already.  The main use of this option is to set it to
        "xterm", when the terminal name doesn't start with "xterm", but it can
        handle xterm mouse codes.
        The "xterm2" value will be set if the xterm version is reported to be
        95 or higher.  This only works when compiled with the |+termresponse|
        feature and if |t_RV| is set to the escape sequence to request the
        xterm version number.  Otherwise "xterm2" must be set explicitly.
        If you do not want 'ttymouse' to be set to "xterm2" automatically, set
        t_RV to an empty string: >
                :set t_RV=
<
                                                *'ttyscroll'* *'tsl'*
'ttyscroll' 'tsl'       number  (default 999)
                        global
        Maximum number of lines to scroll the screen.  If there are more lines
        to scroll the window is redrawn.  For terminals where scrolling is
        very slow and redrawing is not slow this can be set to a small number,
        e.g., 3, to speed up displaying.

                                                *'ttytype'* *'tty'*
'ttytype' 'tty'         string  (default from $TERM)
                        global
        Alias for 'term', see above.

                                                *'undodir'* *'udir'*
'undodir' 'udir'        string  (default ".")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only when compiled with the |+persistent_undo| feature}
        List of directory names for undo files, separated with commas.
        See |'backupdir'| for details of the format.
        "." means using the directory of the file.  The undo file name for
        "file.txt" is ".file.txt.un~".
        For other directories the file name is the full path of the edited
        file, with path separators replaced with "%".
        When writing: The first directory that exists is used. "." always
        works, no directories after "." will be used for writing.
        When reading all entries are tried to find an undo file.  The first
        undo file that exists is used.  When it cannot be read an error is
        given, no further entry is used.
        See |undo-persistence|.

                                                *'undofile'* *'udf'*
'undofile' 'udf'        boolean (default off)
                        local to buffer
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only when compiled with the |+persistent_undo| feature}
        When on, Vim automatically saves undo history to an undo file when
        writing a buffer to a file, and restores undo history from the same
        file on buffer read.
        The directory where the undo file is stored is specified by 'undodir'.
        For more information about this feature see |undo-persistence|.
        The undo file is not read when 'undoreload' causes the buffer from
        before a reload to be saved for undo.
        WARNING: this is a very new feature.  Use at your own risk!

                                                *'undolevels'* *'ul'*
'undolevels' 'ul'       number  (default 100, 1000 for Unix, VMS,
                                                Win32 and OS/2)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Maximum number of changes that can be undone.  Since undo information
        is kept in memory, higher numbers will cause more memory to be used
        (nevertheless, a single change can use an unlimited amount of memory).
        Set to 0 for Vi compatibility: One level of undo and "u" undoes
        itself: >
                set ul=0
<       But you can also get Vi compatibility by including the 'u' flag in
        'cpoptions', and still be able to use CTRL-R to repeat undo.
        Also see |undo-two-ways|.
        Set to a negative number for no undo at all: >
                set ul=-1
<       This helps when you run out of memory for a single change.
        Also see |clear-undo|.

                                                *'undoreload'* *'ur'*
'undoreload' 'ur'       number  (default 10000)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Save the whole buffer for undo when reloading it.  This applies to the
        ":e!" command and reloading for when the buffer changed outside of
        Vim. |FileChangedShell|
        The save only happens when this options is negative or when the number
        of lines is smaller than the value of this option.
        Set this option to zero to disable undo for a reload.

        When saving undo for a reload, any undo file is not read.

        Note that this causes the whole buffer to be stored in memory.  Set
        this option to a lower value if you run out of memory.

                                                *'updatecount'* *'uc'*
'updatecount' 'uc'      number  (default: 200)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        After typing this many characters the swap file will be written to
        disk.  When zero, no swap file will be created at all (see chapter on
        recovery |crash-recovery|).  'updatecount' is set to zero by starting
        Vim with the "-n" option, see |startup|.  When editing in readonly
        mode this option will be initialized to 10000.
        The swapfile can be disabled per buffer with |'swapfile'|.
        When 'updatecount' is set from zero to non-zero, swap files are
        created for all buffers that have 'swapfile' set.  When 'updatecount'
        is set to zero, existing swap files are not deleted.
        Also see |'swapsync'|.
        This option has no meaning in buffers where |'buftype'| is "nofile"
        or "nowrite".

                                                *'updatetime'* *'ut'*
'updatetime' 'ut'       number  (default 4000)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        If this many milliseconds nothing is typed the swap file will be
        written to disk (see |crash-recovery|).  Also used for the
        |CursorHold| autocommand event.

                                                *'verbose'* *'vbs'*
'verbose' 'vbs'         number  (default 0)
                        global
                        {not in Vi, although some versions have a boolean
                        verbose option}
        When bigger than zero, Vim will give messages about what it is doing.
        Currently, these messages are given:
        >= 1    When the viminfo file is read or written.
        >= 2    When a file is ":source"'ed.
        >= 5    Every searched tags file and include file.
        >= 8    Files for which a group of autocommands is executed.
        >= 9    Every executed autocommand.
        >= 12   Every executed function.
        >= 13   When an exception is thrown, caught, finished, or discarded.
        >= 14   Anything pending in a ":finally" clause.
        >= 15   Every executed Ex command (truncated at 200 characters).

        This option can also be set with the "-V" argument.  See |-V|.
        This option is also set by the |:verbose| command.

        When the 'verbosefile' option is set then the verbose messages are not
        displayed.

                                                *'verbosefile'* *'vfile'*
'verbosefile' 'vfile'   string  (default empty)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When not empty all messages are written in a file with this name.
        When the file exists messages are appended.
        Writing to the file ends when Vim exits or when 'verbosefile' is made
        empty.  Writes are buffered, thus may not show up for some time.
        Setting 'verbosefile' to a new value is like making it empty first.
        The difference with |:redir| is that verbose messages are not
        displayed when 'verbosefile' is set.

                                                *'viewdir'* *'vdir'*
'viewdir' 'vdir'        string  (default for Amiga, MS-DOS, OS/2 and Win32:
                                                         "$VIM/vimfiles/view",
                                 for Unix: "~/.vim/view",
                                 for Macintosh: "$VIM:vimfiles:view"
                                 for VMS: "sys$login:vimfiles/view"
                                 for RiscOS: "Choices:vimfiles/view")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+mksession|
                        feature}
        Name of the directory where to store files for |:mkview|.
        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                                *'viewoptions'* *'vop'*
'viewoptions' 'vop'     string  (default: "folds,options,cursor")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+mksession|
                        feature}
        Changes the effect of the |:mkview| command.  It is a comma separated
        list of words.  Each word enables saving and restoring something:
           word         save and restore ~
           cursor       cursor position in file and in window
           folds        manually created folds, opened/closed folds and local
                        fold options
           options      options and mappings local to a window or buffer (not
                        global values for local options)
           slash        backslashes in file names replaced with forward
                        slashes
           unix         with Unix end-of-line format (single <NL>), even when
                        on Windows or DOS

        "slash" and "unix" are useful on Windows when sharing view files
        with Unix.  The Unix version of Vim cannot source dos format scripts,
        but the Windows version of Vim can source unix format scripts.

                                *'viminfo'* *'vi'* *E526* *E527* *E528*
'viminfo' 'vi'          string  (Vi default: "", Vim default for MS-DOS,
                                   Windows and OS/2: '100,<50,s10,h,rA:,rB:,
                                   for Amiga: '100,<50,s10,h,rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:
                                   for others: '100,<50,s10,h)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+viminfo|
                        feature}
        When non-empty, the viminfo file is read upon startup and written
        when exiting Vim (see |viminfo-file|).  The string should be a comma
        separated list of parameters, each consisting of a single character
        identifying the particular parameter, followed by a number or string
        which specifies the value of that parameter.  If a particular
        character is left out, then the default value is used for that
        parameter.  The following is a list of the identifying characters and
        the effect of their value.
        CHAR    VALUE   ~
                                                        *viminfo-!*
        !       When included, save and restore global variables that start
                with an uppercase letter, and don't contain a lowercase
                letter.  Thus "KEEPTHIS and "K_L_M" are stored, but "KeepThis"
                and "_K_L_M" are not.  Nested List and Dict items may not be
                read back correctly, you end up with an empty item.
                                                        *viminfo-quote*
        "       Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  Old name of
                the '<' item, with the disadvantage that you need to put a
                backslash before the ", otherwise it will be recognized as the
                start of a comment!
                                                        *viminfo-%*
        %       When included, save and restore the buffer list.  If Vim is
                started with a file name argument, the buffer list is not
                restored.  If Vim is started without a file name argument, the
                buffer list is restored from the viminfo file.  Buffers
                without a file name and buffers for help files are not written
                to the viminfo file.
                When followed by a number, the number specifies the maximum
                number of buffers that are stored.  Without a number all
                buffers are stored.
                                                        *viminfo-'*
        '       Maximum number of previously edited files for which the marks
                are remembered.  This parameter must always be included when
                'viminfo' is non-empty.
                Including this item also means that the |jumplist| and the
                |changelist| are stored in the viminfo file.
                                                        *viminfo-/*
        /       Maximum number of items in the search pattern history to be
                saved.  If non-zero, then the previous search and substitute
                patterns are also saved.  When not included, the value of
                'history' is used.
                                                        *viminfo-:*
        :       Maximum number of items in the command-line history to be
                saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
                                                        *viminfo-<*
        <       Maximum number of lines saved for each register.  If zero then
                registers are not saved.  When not included, all lines are
                saved.  '"' is the old name for this item.
                Also see the 's' item below: limit specified in Kbyte.
                                                        *viminfo-@*
        @       Maximum number of items in the input-line history to be
                saved.  When not included, the value of 'history' is used.
                                                        *viminfo-c*
        c       When included, convert the text in the viminfo file from the
                'encoding' used when writing the file to the current
                'encoding'.  See |viminfo-encoding|.
                                                        *viminfo-f*
        f       Whether file marks need to be stored.  If zero, file marks ('0
                to '9, 'A to 'Z) are not stored.  When not present or when
                non-zero, they are all stored.  '0 is used for the current
                cursor position (when exiting or when doing ":wviminfo").
                                                        *viminfo-h*
        h       Disable the effect of 'hlsearch' when loading the viminfo
                file.  When not included, it depends on whether ":nohlsearch"
                has been used since the last search command.
                                                        *viminfo-n*
        n       Name of the viminfo file.  The name must immediately follow
                the 'n'.  Must be the last one!  If the "-i" argument was
                given when starting Vim, that file name overrides the one
                given here with 'viminfo'.  Environment variables are expanded
                when opening the file, not when setting the option.
                                                        *viminfo-r*
        r       Removable media.  The argument is a string (up to the next
                ',').  This parameter can be given several times.  Each
                specifies the start of a path for which no marks will be
                stored.  This is to avoid removable media.  For MS-DOS you
                could use "ra:,rb:", for Amiga "rdf0:,rdf1:,rdf2:".  You can
                also use it for temp files, e.g., for Unix: "r/tmp".  Case is
                ignored.  Maximum length of each 'r' argument is 50
                characters.
                                                        *viminfo-s*
        s       Maximum size of an item in Kbyte.  If zero then registers are
                not saved.  Currently only applies to registers.  The default
                "s10" will exclude registers with more than 10 Kbyte of text.
                Also see the '<' item above: line count limit.

        Example: >
            :set viminfo='50,<1000,s100,:0,n~/vim/viminfo
<
        '50             Marks will be remembered for the last 50 files you
                        edited.
        <1000           Contents of registers (up to 1000 lines each) will be
                        remembered.
        s100            Registers with more than 100 Kbyte text are skipped.
        :0              Command-line history will not be saved.
        n~/vim/viminfo  The name of the file to use is "~/vim/viminfo".
        no /            Since '/' is not specified, the default will be used,
                        that is, save all of the search history, and also the
                        previous search and substitute patterns.
        no %            The buffer list will not be saved nor read back.
        no h            'hlsearch' highlighting will be restored.

        When setting 'viminfo' from an empty value you can use |:rviminfo| to
        load the contents of the file, this is not done automatically.

        This option cannot be set from a |modeline| or in the |sandbox|, for
        security reasons.

                                            *'virtualedit'* *'ve'*
'virtualedit' 've'      string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the
                        |+virtualedit| feature}
        A comma separated list of these words:
            block       Allow virtual editing in Visual block mode.
            insert      Allow virtual editing in Insert mode.
            all         Allow virtual editing in all modes.
            onemore     Allow the cursor to move just past the end of the line

        Virtual editing means that the cursor can be positioned where there is
        no actual character.  This can be halfway into a tab or beyond the end
        of the line.  Useful for selecting a rectangle in Visual mode and
        editing a table.
        "onemore" is not the same, it will only allow moving the cursor just
        after the last character of the line.  This makes some commands more
        consistent.  Previously the cursor was always past the end of the line
        if the line was empty.  But it is far from Vi compatible.  It may also
        break some plugins or Vim scripts.  For example because |l| can move
        the cursor after the last character.  Use with care!
        Using the |$| command will move to the last character in the line, not
        past it.  This may actually move the cursor to the left!
        It doesn't make sense to combine "all" with "onemore", but you will
        not get a warning for it.

                        *'visualbell'* *'vb'* *'novisualbell'* *'novb'* *beep*
'visualbell' 'vb'       boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Use visual bell instead of beeping.  The terminal code to display the
        visual bell is given with 't_vb'.  When no beep or flash is wanted,
        use ":set vb t_vb=".
        Note: When the GUI starts, 't_vb' is reset to its default value.  You
        might want to set it again in your |gvimrc|.
        In the GUI, 't_vb' defaults to "<Esc>|f", which inverts the display
        for 20 msec.  If you want to use a different time, use "<Esc>|40f",
        where 40 is the time in msec.
        Does not work on the Amiga, you always get a screen flash.
        Also see 'errorbells'.

                                                *'warn'* *'nowarn'*
'warn'                  boolean (default on)
                        global
        Give a warning message when a shell command is used while the buffer
        has been changed.

                     *'weirdinvert'* *'wiv'* *'noweirdinvert'* *'nowiv'*
'weirdinvert' 'wiv'     boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        This option has the same effect as the 't_xs' terminal option.
        It is provided for backwards compatibility with version 4.x.
        Setting 'weirdinvert' has the effect of making 't_xs' non-empty, and
        vice versa.  Has no effect when the GUI is running.

                                                *'whichwrap'* *'ww'*
'whichwrap' 'ww'        string  (Vim default: "b,s", Vi default: "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Allow specified keys that move the cursor left/right to move to the
        previous/next line when the cursor is on the first/last character in
        the line.  Concatenate characters to allow this for these keys:
                char   key        mode  ~
                 b    <BS>       Normal and Visual
                 s    <Space>    Normal and Visual
                 h    "h"        Normal and Visual (not recommended)
                 l    "l"        Normal and Visual (not recommended)
                 <    <Left>     Normal and Visual
                 >    <Right>    Normal and Visual
                 ~    "~"        Normal
                 [    <Left>     Insert and Replace
                 ]    <Right>    Insert and Replace
        For example: >
                :set ww=<,>,[,]
<       allows wrap only when cursor keys are used.
        When the movement keys are used in combination with a delete or change
        operator, the <EOL> also counts for a character.  This makes "3h"
        different from "3dh" when the cursor crosses the end of a line.  This
        is also true for "x" and "X", because they do the same as "dl" and
        "dh".  If you use this, you may also want to use the mapping
        ":map <BS> X" to make backspace delete the character in front of the
        cursor.
        When 'l' is included and it is used after an operator at the end of a
        line then it will not move to the next line.  This makes "dl", "cl",
        "yl" etc. work normally.
        NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                                *'wildchar'* *'wc'*
'wildchar' 'wc'         number  (Vim default: <Tab>, Vi default: CTRL-E)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Character you have to type to start wildcard expansion in the
        command-line, as specified with 'wildmode'.
        More info here: |cmdline-completion|.
        The character is not recognized when used inside a macro.  See
        'wildcharm' for that.
        Although 'wc' is a number option, you can set it to a special key: >
                :set wc=<Esc>
<       NOTE: This option is set to the Vi default value when 'compatible' is
        set and to the Vim default value when 'compatible' is reset.

                                                *'wildcharm'* *'wcm'*
'wildcharm' 'wcm'       number  (default: none (0))
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        'wildcharm' works exactly like 'wildchar', except that it is
        recognized when used inside a macro.  You can find "spare" command-line
        keys suitable for this option by looking at |ex-edit-index|.  Normally
        you'll never actually type 'wildcharm', just use it in mappings that
        automatically invoke completion mode, e.g.: >
                :set wcm=<C-Z>
                :cnoremap ss so $vim/sessions/*.vim<C-Z>
<       Then after typing :ss you can use CTRL-P & CTRL-N.

                                                *'wildignore'* *'wig'*
'wildignore' 'wig'      string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
                        feature}
        A list of file patterns.  A file that matches with one of these
        patterns is ignored when completing file or directory names, and
        influences the result of |expand()|, |glob()| and |globpath()| unless
        a flag is passed to disable this.
        The pattern is used like with |:autocmd|, see |autocmd-patterns|.
        Also see 'suffixes'.
        Example: >
                :set wildignore=*.o,*.obj
<       The use of |:set+=| and |:set-=| is preferred when adding or removing
        a pattern from the list.  This avoids problems when a future version
        uses another default.


                        *'wildignorecase'* *'wic'* *'nowildignorecase'* *'nowic'*
'wildignorecase' 'wic'  boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        When set case is ignored when completing file names and directories.
        Has no effect on systems where file name case is generally ignored.
        Does not apply when the shell is used to expand wildcards, which
        happens when there are special characters.


                                *'wildmenu'* *'wmnu'* *'nowildmenu'* *'nowmnu'*
'wildmenu' 'wmnu'       boolean (default off)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available if compiled without the |+wildmenu|
                        feature}
        When 'wildmenu' is on, command-line completion operates in an enhanced
        mode.  On pressing 'wildchar' (usually <Tab>) to invoke completion,
        the possible matches are shown just above the command line, with the
        first match highlighted (overwriting the status line, if there is
        one).  Keys that show the previous/next match, such as <Tab> or
        CTRL-P/CTRL-N, cause the highlight to move to the appropriate match.
        When 'wildmode' is used, "wildmenu" mode is used where "full" is
        specified.  "longest" and "list" do not start "wildmenu" mode.
        If there are more matches than can fit in the line, a ">" is shown on
        the right and/or a "<" is shown on the left.  The status line scrolls
        as needed.
        The "wildmenu" mode is abandoned when a key is hit that is not used
        for selecting a completion.
        While the "wildmenu" is active the following keys have special
        meanings:

        <Left> <Right>  - select previous/next match (like CTRL-P/CTRL-N)
        <Down>          - in filename/menu name completion: move into a
                          subdirectory or submenu.
        <CR>            - in menu completion, when the cursor is just after a
                          dot: move into a submenu.
        <Up>            - in filename/menu name completion: move up into
                          parent directory or parent menu.

        This makes the menus accessible from the console |console-menus|.

        If you prefer the <Left> and <Right> keys to move the cursor instead
        of selecting a different match, use this: >
                :cnoremap <Left> <Space><BS><Left>
                :cnoremap <Right> <Space><BS><Right>
<
        The "WildMenu" highlighting is used for displaying the current match
        |hl-WildMenu|.

                                                *'wildmode'* *'wim'*
'wildmode' 'wim'        string  (Vim default: "full")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Completion mode that is used for the character specified with
        'wildchar'.  It is a comma separated list of up to four parts.  Each
        part specifies what to do for each consecutive use of 'wildchar'.  The
        first part specifies the behavior for the first use of 'wildchar',
        The second part for the second use, etc.
        These are the possible values for each part:
        ""              Complete only the first match.
        "full"          Complete the next full match.  After the last match,
                        the original string is used and then the first match
                        again.
        "longest"       Complete till longest common string.  If this doesn't
                        result in a longer string, use the next part.
        "longest:full"  Like "longest", but also start 'wildmenu' if it is
                        enabled.
        "list"          When more than one match, list all matches.
        "list:full"     When more than one match, list all matches and
                        complete first match.
        "list:longest"  When more than one match, list all matches and
                        complete till longest common string.
        When there is only a single match, it is fully completed in all cases.

        Examples: >
                :set wildmode=full
<       Complete first full match, next match, etc.  (the default) >
                :set wildmode=longest,full
<       Complete longest common string, then each full match >
                :set wildmode=list:full
<       List all matches and complete each full match >
                :set wildmode=list,full
<       List all matches without completing, then each full match >
                :set wildmode=longest,list
<       Complete longest common string, then list alternatives.
        More info here: |cmdline-completion|.

                                                *'wildoptions'* *'wop'*
'wildoptions' 'wop'     string  (default "")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+wildignore|
                        feature}
        A list of words that change how command line completion is done.
        Currently only one word is allowed:
          tagfile       When using CTRL-D to list matching tags, the kind of
                        tag and the file of the tag is listed.  Only one match
                        is displayed per line.  Often used tag kinds are:
                                d       #define
                                f       function
        Also see |cmdline-completion|.

                                                *'winaltkeys'* *'wak'*
'winaltkeys' 'wak'      string  (default "menu")
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {only used in Win32, Motif, GTK and Photon GUI}
        Some GUI versions allow the access to menu entries by using the ALT
        key in combination with a character that appears underlined in the
        menu.  This conflicts with the use of the ALT key for mappings and
        entering special characters.  This option tells what to do:
          no    Don't use ALT keys for menus.  ALT key combinations can be
                mapped, but there is no automatic handling.  This can then be
                done with the |:simalt| command.
          yes   ALT key handling is done by the windowing system.  ALT key
                combinations cannot be mapped.
          menu  Using ALT in combination with a character that is a menu
                shortcut key, will be handled by the windowing system.  Other
                keys can be mapped.
        If the menu is disabled by excluding 'm' from 'guioptions', the ALT
        key is never used for the menu.
        This option is not used for <F10>; on Win32 and with GTK <F10> will
        select the menu, unless it has been mapped.

                                                *'window'* *'wi'*
'window' 'wi'           number  (default screen height - 1)
                        global
        Window height.  Do not confuse this with the height of the Vim window,
        use 'lines' for that.
        Used for |CTRL-F| and |CTRL-B| when there is only one window and the
        value is smaller than 'lines' minus one.  The screen will scroll
        'window' minus two lines, with a minimum of one.
        When 'window' is equal to 'lines' minus one CTRL-F and CTRL-B scroll
        in a much smarter way, taking care of wrapping lines.
        When resizing the Vim window, the value is smaller than 1 or more than
        or equal to 'lines' it will be set to 'lines' minus 1.
        {Vi also uses the option to specify the number of displayed lines}

                                                *'winheight'* *'wh'* *E591*
'winheight' 'wh'        number  (default 1)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
                        feature}
        Minimal number of lines for the current window.  This is not a hard
        minimum, Vim will use fewer lines if there is not enough room.  If the
        focus goes to a window that is smaller, its size is increased, at the
        cost of the height of other windows.
        Set 'winheight' to a small number for normal editing.
        Set it to 999 to make the current window fill most of the screen.
        Other windows will be only 'winminheight' high.  This has the drawback
        that ":all" will create only two windows.  To avoid "vim -o 1 2 3 4"
        to create only two windows, set the option after startup is done,
        using the |VimEnter| event: >
                au VimEnter * set winheight=999
<       Minimum value is 1.
        The height is not adjusted after one of the commands that change the
        height of the current window.
        'winheight' applies to the current window.  Use 'winminheight' to set
        the minimal height for other windows.

                        *'winfixheight'* *'wfh'* *'nowinfixheight'* *'nowfh'*
'winfixheight' 'wfh'    boolean (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
                        feature}
        Keep the window height when windows are opened or closed and
        'equalalways' is set.  Also for |CTRL-W_=|.  Set by default for the
        |preview-window| and |quickfix-window|.
        The height may be changed anyway when running out of room.

                        *'winfixwidth'* *'wfw'* *'nowinfixwidth'* *'nowfw'*
'winfixwidth' 'wfw'     boolean (default off)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
                        feature}
        Keep the window width when windows are opened or closed and
        'equalalways' is set.  Also for |CTRL-W_=|.
        The width may be changed anyway when running out of room.

                                                *'winminheight'* *'wmh'*
'winminheight' 'wmh'    number  (default 1)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+windows|
                        feature}
        The minimal height of a window, when it's not the current window.
        This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
        When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero lines (i.e. just a
        status bar) if necessary.  They will return to at least one line when
        they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere to go.)
        Use 'winheight' to set the minimal height of the current window.
        This option is only checked when making a window smaller.  Don't use a
        large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
        windows.  A value of 0 to 3 is reasonable.

                                                *'winminwidth'* *'wmw'*
'winminwidth' 'wmw'     number  (default 1)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
                        feature}
        The minimal width of a window, when it's not the current window.
        This is a hard minimum, windows will never become smaller.
        When set to zero, windows may be "squashed" to zero columns (i.e. just
        a vertical separator) if necessary.  They will return to at least one
        line when they become active (since the cursor has to have somewhere
        to go.)
        Use 'winwidth' to set the minimal width of the current window.
        This option is only checked when making a window smaller.  Don't use a
        large number, it will cause errors when opening more than a few
        windows.  A value of 0 to 12 is reasonable.

                                                *'winwidth'* *'wiw'* *E592*
'winwidth' 'wiw'        number  (default 20)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
                        {not available when compiled without the |+vertsplit|
                        feature}
        Minimal number of columns for the current window.  This is not a hard
        minimum, Vim will use fewer columns if there is not enough room.  If
        the current window is smaller, its size is increased, at the cost of
        the width of other windows.  Set it to 999 to make the current window
        always fill the screen.  Set it to a small number for normal editing.
        The width is not adjusted after one of the commands to change the
        width of the current window.
        'winwidth' applies to the current window.  Use 'winminwidth' to set
        the minimal width for other windows.

                                                *'wrap'* *'nowrap'*
'wrap'                  boolean (default on)
                        local to window
                        {not in Vi}
        This option changes how text is displayed.  It doesn't change the text
        in the buffer, see 'textwidth' for that.
        When on, lines longer than the width of the window will wrap and
        displaying continues on the next line.  When off lines will not wrap
        and only part of long lines will be displayed.  When the cursor is
        moved to a part that is not shown, the screen will scroll
        horizontally.
        The line will be broken in the middle of a word if necessary.  See
        'linebreak' to get the break at a word boundary.
        To make scrolling horizontally a bit more useful, try this: >
                :set sidescroll=5
                :set listchars+=precedes:<,extends:>
<       See 'sidescroll', 'listchars' and |wrap-off|.
        This option can't be set from a |modeline| when the 'diff' option is
        on.

                                                *'wrapmargin'* *'wm'*
'wrapmargin' 'wm'       number  (default 0)
                        local to buffer
        Number of characters from the right window border where wrapping
        starts.  When typing text beyond this limit, an <EOL> will be inserted
        and inserting continues on the next line.
        Options that add a margin, such as 'number' and 'foldcolumn', cause
        the text width to be further reduced.  This is Vi compatible.
        When 'textwidth' is non-zero, this option is not used.
        See also 'formatoptions' and |ins-textwidth|.  {Vi: works differently
        and less usefully}

                                   *'wrapscan'* *'ws'* *'nowrapscan'* *'nows'*
'wrapscan' 'ws'         boolean (default on)                    *E384* *E385*
                        global
        Searches wrap around the end of the file.  Also applies to |]s| and
        |[s|, searching for spelling mistakes.

                                                   *'write'* *'nowrite'*
'write'                 boolean (default on)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Allows writing files.  When not set, writing a file is not allowed.
        Can be used for a view-only mode, where modifications to the text are
        still allowed.  Can be reset with the |-m| or |-M| command line
        argument.  Filtering text is still possible, even though this requires
        writing a temporary file.

                                   *'writeany'* *'wa'* *'nowriteany'* *'nowa'*
'writeany' 'wa'         boolean (default off)
                        global
        Allows writing to any file with no need for "!" override.

                             *'writebackup'* *'wb'* *'nowritebackup'* *'nowb'*
'writebackup' 'wb'      boolean (default on with |+writebackup| feature, off
                                        otherwise)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        Make a backup before overwriting a file.  The backup is removed after
        the file was successfully written, unless the 'backup' option is
        also on.  Reset this option if your file system is almost full.  See
        |backup-table| for another explanation.
        When the 'backupskip' pattern matches, a backup is not made anyway.
        NOTE: This option is set to the default value when 'compatible' is
        set.

                                                *'writedelay'* *'wd'*
'writedelay' 'wd'       number  (default 0)
                        global
                        {not in Vi}
        The number of microseconds to wait for each character sent to the
        screen.  When non-zero, characters are sent to the terminal one by
        one.  For MS-DOS pcterm this does not work.  For debugging purposes.

 vim:tw=78:ts=8:ft=help:norl: